Nissan Sentra 2023 Owner Manual
Below you will find brief information for the 2023 Sentra sedan. This comprehensive owner's manual details the operation and maintenance of your vehicle, covering essential safety features like seat belts, child restraints, and the Supplemental Restraint System. It also guides you through instruments, controls, pre-driving checks, multimedia systems including audio and phone, starting and driving procedures, emergency information, appearance care, and a detailed maintenance schedule.
Advertisement
Advertisement
2023
SENTRA
OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
OWNER’S MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
The information contained within this supplement revises or adds to the
“Foreword” section in the 2023 NISSAN Owner’s Manual.
• NISSAN SOFTWARE LICENSE
Read carefully and keep in the vehicle.
Printing: May 2022
Publication No. SU23E0 NALLU0
NISSAN SOFTWARE LICENSE
• Your vehicle includes physical parts and/or physical components of such parts on which software and/or firmware (“Software”) is embedded or installed. Additionally, updates to Software may be made available by NISSAN for download and installation by owners from time to time as determined by NISSAN in its sole discretion. Such Software, and all updates thereto, including updates delivered by
NISSAN to your vehicle over the air (collectively “Updates”), are licensed, and not sold, to you. A portion of the Software may contain or consist of open source software, which may be used under the terms and conditions of the specific license under which the open source software is distributed. For other Software, including Software for which there is no separate license agreement between you and the manufacturer or owner of the Software, the terms and conditions governing your right to use and the use of the installed
Software, including any Updates, applications, services, and content provided for or through the Software, are set forth in the End User
License Agreement found at https://www.nissanusa.com/owners/ownership. Your use of the Software, including any Updates, constitutes consent to the End User License Agreement’s terms and conditions.
• PLEASE NOTE: The End User License Agreement contains an arbitration clause. You may opt out of this arbitration clause within 30 days of the date of your vehicle purchase by sending a signed, written notice to NISSAN at the following address:
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003
• Please refer to “Updating system software” in the 5. Information section or "Software Update" in the 2. Getting Started section of the
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual for information about installing Over-the-Air Updates. For questions or assistance concerning installation of any over-the-air Update, you may contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs at 1-800-333-0207. You may also choose to visit a
NISSAN dealer for assistance - charges may apply.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state's lemon law.
When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!
• NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.
• ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.
• ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems.
Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.
• ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN.
The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.
This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https:// owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide . If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-
GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.
APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.”
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/”.
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to
Panasonic.
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver's side)
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: [email protected]
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
– Your NISSAN dealer's name
– Your comments or questions
OR
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: [email protected]
If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com
(for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca
(for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Do-it-yourself
Maintenance and schedules
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
9
10
11
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
Warning/Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
Top tether anchors (P. 1-27, 1-34, 1-39)
2.
3.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
supplemental rollover air bag (P. 1-59)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
LII2723
4.
Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7)
5.
Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and
shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-11, 1-18,
6.
7.
Supplemental front-impact air bags
Front passenger supplemental knee air
8.
9.
Driver supplemental knee air bag
Occupant classification sensor
10.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-59)
11.
12.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
13.
Rear outboard seat belts with
pretensioner(s) (P. 1-11, 1-18, 1-63)
14.
Rear outboard seat-mounted side
impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-59)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
EXTERIOR FRONT
6.
7.
Side view camera (if so equipped)
Headlight and turn signal switch 8.
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
9.
Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-59)
10.
Front view camera (if so equipped)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
1.
2.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-50)
3.
4.
5.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-7)
LII2713
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
LII2636
3.
High-mounted stop light (P. 8-24)
4.
5.
Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-51)
6.
Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-7)
7.
8.
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
9.
10.
Rear armrest (if so equipped) (P. 1-7)
Cup holders (if so equipped) (P. 2-70)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
1.
2.
Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-74)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
LII2637
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-52, 2-59)
Steering wheel switch (P. 2-18, 2-33)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
3.
4.
LII2638
Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)
Warning and indicators lights (P. 2-9)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-18, 2-32)
5.
Cruise control switches (P. 5-59)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
6.
7.
8.
9.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-50)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-54)
10.
11.
Front passenger supplemental air bag
12.
13.
Front passenger supplemental knee air
14.
15.
Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11)
16.
Climate controls (P. 4-32, 4-40)
17.
Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-61)
18.
Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-26)
19.
20.
Fuel filler door release (P. 3-23)
21.
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-58)
For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
LDI3477
2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model)
1.
2.
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
9.
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with an engine cover.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning/
Indicator light (red) or
Name
Brake warning light
Charge warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Page
Master warning light
Warning/
Indicator light (red)
Warning/
Indicator light
(yellow) or
Name Page Warning/
Indicator light
(yellow)
Seat belt warning light and chime
Supplemental air bag warning light
Name Page
Name Page
Automatic Emergency Braking with Pedestrian
Detection system warning light (if so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light
Low tire pressure warning light
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light
Master warning light
Power steering warning light
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Warning/
Indicator light
(yellow)
Name Page
Rear Automatic
Braking system warning light (if so equipped)
Slip indicator light
Warning/
Indicator light
(other)
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF indicator light
Name Page
ECO mode indicator light (green)
Warning/
Indicator light
(other)
Name Page
Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) (green)
High Beam Assist indicator light
(green) (if so equipped)
High beam indicator light (blue)
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
Turn signal/ hazard indicator lights (green)
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
MEMO
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
(if so equipped for driver's seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Center armrest (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-64
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-64
SEATS
WARNING
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
ARS1152
• For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, see “Precautions on seat belt
• After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
• Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
• Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
• The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.
1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (for passenger's seat and if so equipped for driver's seat)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.
LRS3245
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position.
LRS3246
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see “Precautions on seat belt usage”
(P. 1-11). Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
LRS3251
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped for driver's seat)
Operating tips
• The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch.
• Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.
LRS3478
Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained.
1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see “Precautions on seat belt usage”
(P. 1-11). Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.
LRS2784
Seat lifter
Move the switch as shown to adjust the height of the seat cushion.
LRS2270
Lumbar support
The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver.
Push the switch as shown to adjust the seatback lumbar area.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
LRS2666
Thigh extension (if so equipped for driver’s seat)
Pull up and hold the lever to extend the front portion to the desired position.
LRS3247
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Pull the knob down.
to fold each seatback
WARNING
• Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
• When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
• Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
LRS3638
CENTER ARMREST (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest down as shown.
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions.
Adjustable head restraints/ headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/ headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/ headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.
LRS2403
The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/ headrests.
䉱
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.
쮿
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
• Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
• Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position.
• The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
• Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.
• If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
LRS2300
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
LRS2299
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.
LRS2302
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
LRS2303
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch (notches) O must be installed in the hole with the lock knob .
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
WRS0134
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.
LRS2351
For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.
LRS2305
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.
1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SEAT BELTS
LRS2306
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
SSS0136
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
WARNING
• Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.
1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0134 SSS0016
WARNING
• The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.
SSS0014
WARNING
• Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
• Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.
• Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
• Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
• Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
• Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.
• If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system.
Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
• Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
• All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND
CHIME
The driver and front passenger seat is equipped with an enhanced seat belt reminder function. If your vehicle is equipped with an enhanced seat belt reminder function, a visual and audible alert will operate if a driver or front passenger seat belt is unbuckled at speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more under the following conditions:
• If the driver seat belt is not fastened.
• The front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened and the seat is occupied by a passenger for 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
• The front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened and objects or external force on the passenger seat change the seat belt reminder classification to Occupied.
The seat belt warning light will flash under the conditions shown above until the necessary seat belt is securely fastened.
A warning chime will sound for approximately 90 seconds or until one of the following conditions is met:
• The unbuckled front occupant’s seat belt is securely fastened.
• The seat belt reminder function in the front passenger seat no longer detects that the front passenger seat is occupied.
• The ignition is turned off or the vehicle is placed in P (Park).
The below situations could result in the seat belt reminder light being illuminated and the chime sounding, even with no occupant present in the passenger seat:
• Heavy objects placed on the seat.
• Someone pushing or pulling on the front passenger seat.
1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
• An object placed under the front passenger seat.
• An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
• An object hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
• A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
NOTE:
The rear seats are equipped with a seat belt warning message in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) TYPE A”
(P. 2-18) or “Vehicle information display 7
inch (18 cm) TYPE B” (P. 2-32).
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
• Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
• For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.
• Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked.
Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Manual front seat shown
(if so equipped)
LRS3245
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Power front seat shown (if so equipped)
1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS3478 LRS2674
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle
O until you hear and feel the latch engage.
• The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.
• If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.
LRS2675
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips
O as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack
O
. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes of operation:
• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information,
see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22).
The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, see “Front passenger air bag and status light”
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:
• Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.
WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle cally retracts.
. The seat belt automati-
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:
• When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor
• When the vehicle slows down rapidly
1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0242
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, see “Precautions on
seat belt usage” (P. 1-11). To adjust, pull out
the adjustment button
O and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position
O
, so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
WARNING
• After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
• The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/ shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
• Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.
• Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender.
Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
• Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
• To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
• If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
• Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
• Rear-facing child restraints
• Forward-facing child restraints
• Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck.
The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, see “Child re-
1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22).
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, see “Supplemental Restraint Sys-
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen.
A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be positioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs, use the seat belt without the booster seat.
A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
• Are the child’s back and hips against the vehicle seatback?
• Is the child able to sit without slouching?
• Do the child’s knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?
• Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
• Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
• Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.
1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1098
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
• Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
WRS0256
– The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
– Infants and children should never be held on anyone's lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see “Forwardfacing child restraint installation
using the seat belts” (P. 1-35).
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child.
A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
– Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts, or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
• When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, see
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
• Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
• Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.
• If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
• If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint
(not both at the same time).
• If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5
kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
• Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.
LRS3268
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points can be used to install child restraints in either of the rear outboard seating positions or in the center rear seating position. Please refer to the following section of this Owner’s Manual for specific information about installing a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Only attach LATCH system compatible child restraints to the Lower Anchors shown in the illustration. For additional information, refer to the following sections of this Owner’s
Manual for installation guidance.
– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
LRS3036
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
LRS3269
LATCH in the center rear seating position
There are no LATCH anchors dedicated to the center rear seating position. However, the inboard LATCH anchors belonging to the two outboard seating positions (indicated by the arrows) can be used together to secure a CRS in the center rear seating position. These anchors are separated by a distance O of 16 in (404 mm). Before attempting to secure a CRS in this seating position, ensure that the CRS manufacturer’s instructions permit the use of LATCH anchors with the spacing indicated above.
(These are sometimes referred to as
“shared anchors” or “borrowed anchors.”)
CRS with rigid lower attachments cannot be installed in the center seat. This type of
CRS should only be installed in the outboard seating positions.
WARNING
Never attach two CRS attachments to the same LATCH anchor. This may overload the anchor in a collision, which could increase the risk of the occupant’s serious injury or death.
When installing the CRS in the center rear seating position with the inboard
LATCH anchors, be careful to ensure any occupant or CRS in the outboard seating positions is properly restrained using the vehicle seat belt and there is no interference with the center CRS installation. If the outboard occupants cannot be properly restrained, consider using the vehicle seat belt to restrain the
CRS in the center seating position, or moving the CRS to another position instead.
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.
1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.
LRS3284
Top tether anchor point locations
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts. For additional information, see
“Installing top tether strap” (P. 1-34).
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Anchor points parcel shelf.
are located on the rear
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20)
and “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) before install-
ing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
LRS2997
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
LRS2996
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20)
and “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) before install-
ing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
1.
Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.
Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2395
Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS2396
Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
LRS2397
Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20)
and “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) before install-
ing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2995
Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, see “Installing top tether strap”
LRS2994
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place.
Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed.
For additional information, see “Head restraints/headrests”
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.
WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS3283
Rear seats
䊊
䊊
Top tether strap
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors.
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD AND CENTER SEATING
POSITIONS
1. Position the top tether strap seatback.
over the
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, see “Front passenger air bag and
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20)
and “Child restraints” (P. 1-22) before install-
ing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1.
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place.
Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed.
For additional information, see “Head restraints/headrests”
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, see “Installing top tether strap”
1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.
LRS0865
Forward-facing — step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger air bag
Move the child restraint to another seating position.
Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
LRS3283
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD AND CENTER SEATING
POSITIONS
1. Position the top tether strap seatback.
over the
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Rear seats
䊊
䊊
Top tether strap
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child's arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/ shoulder belt.
A. Low back booster seat
B. High back booster seat
LRS2479 LRS0453
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
• Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
• Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0464
• Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a high back booster seat should be used.
• If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” (P. 1-20),
“Child restraints” (P. 1-22) and “Booster
seats” (P. 1-40) before installing a child
restraint.
WRS0699
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
1.
If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Front passenger position
LRS0454
Rear center position
LRS0451 LRS0452
Rear outboard position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place.
Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed.
For additional information, see “Head restraints/headrests”
1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
LRS0865
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. For additional information, see
“Front passenger air bag and status
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
• Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System)
• Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
• Rear outboard seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bag system
• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
• Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag
• Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats and rear outboard seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Rear outboard seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the rear seat passengers in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag
This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver’s and front passenger’s knees in certain collisions.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, see
The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
• The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents
WRS0031
• The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit. For additional information, see “Front passenger air bag and status light”
• The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.
• The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
• The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
For additional information, see
“Front passenger air bag and status
• Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.
1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1133
ARS1041
WARNING
• Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
ARS1042
WARNING
• Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.
ARS1043
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
ARS1044
1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1045 ARS1046
WARNING
• Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see “Child re-
LRS3119
WARNING
• The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.
WRS0431
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:
• The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
WRS0032
WARNING
• When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
• Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.
1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0162 SSS0159
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Top tether anchor
2. Rear seat belts
LRS3248
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
4. Head restraints/headrests
5. Front seat belts
6. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side shown; front passenger side similar)
7. Supplemental front-impact air bags
8. Front crash zone sensor
9. Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags
10. Front seats
11. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
12. Satellite sensor (passenger side shown; driver’s side similar)
13. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats shown; rear outboard seats similar)
14. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
15. Rear seats
16. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
17. Rear outboard seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bag
18. Satellite sensor (passenger side shown; driver’s side similar)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air bag System, please observe the following items.
• Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket (if so equipped).
• Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket (if so equipped).
• Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback, such as a child restraint installed in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor.
• Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
• Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
• If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag and the front passenger supplemental knee air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional informa-
tion, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22).
• Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.
• If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.
1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
• Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada.
All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver.
For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on information from the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag may be automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, see
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
(P. 1-54). One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags, other than the driver’s and front passenger’s supplemental knee air bags, do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
CONDITION
Empty
Nobody/Somebody
Adult
LRS0865
Front passenger air bag and status light
DESCRIPTION
WARNING
The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates.
Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
PASSENGER AIR BAG
STATUS LIGHT ( )
ON (illuminated)
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat.
The status of the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air bag status light is located on the instrument panel.
which
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND FRONT PASSENGER
SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG STATUS
INHIBITED Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
Adult in the front passenger seat
ON (illuminated)
OFF (dark)
INHIBITED
ACTIVATED
In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.
For additional information, see “Normal op-
eration” (P. 1-56) and “Troubleshooting”
1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S.
regulations. If the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are OFF, it will not inflate in a crash.
The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For additional
information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-22).
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor.
Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are automatically turned OFF.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the meter and gauges area of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Precautions
• Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket
(if so equipped).
• Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.
• Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
• Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in “Seats”
(P. 1-2). Sit upright, leaning against the
seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in “Seat
belts” (P. 1-11). Front passenger seat belt
buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly recommended that the front passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:
• Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
• Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
• A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
• Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• An object placed under the front passenger seat.
• An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
• Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
• The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in “Child restraints”
• An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket (if so equipped).
• A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
• Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• An object placed under the front passenger seat.
• An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions
WARNING
• Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
• Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
• No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system.
This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.
• Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
• Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
• Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
• Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).
• No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
• It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
• A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's
Manual.
LRS3142
Front and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front and rear outboard seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails.
All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed.
The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front and rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver, front passenger and rear outboard occupants seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag.
Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
• Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front and rear seats.
Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front and rear door finisher and the front and rear seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflate.
• Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
• No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
• Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel.
This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
• Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front and rear seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
• It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner's Manual.
LRS3270
Driver’s side
Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags
The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the driver’s and front passenger’s side.
All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed.
The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
LRS3271
Front passenger’s side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper knee air bag operation.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
The knee air bag helps to cushion the impact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over
OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
• Do not place any objects between the knee bolster and the driver’s or passenger’s seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.
• Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
• No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the knee air bag system.
• Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.
• Tampering with the knee air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the driver or passenger knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.
1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
• It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the knee air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.
Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front and rear outboard seats)
WARNING
• The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
• If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.
• It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.
• If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front and rear outboard seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional information, see "Supplemental air bag warning
light" (P. 1-64). If the operation of the supple-
mental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's
Manual.
WRS0897
1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.
1-64 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
• The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
• The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
• The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
• Once a front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or knee air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced.
Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
• The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
• If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.
1-66 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
MEMO
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Warning/Indicator lights (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Warning/Indicator lights (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm)
TYPE A (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Vehicle information display– 7 inch (18 cm)
Type B (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Resetting the drive computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-48
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-61
Emergency Call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . 2-61
Emergency support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
USB/iPod® charging port (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-66
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
LII2638
1.
2.
3.
4.
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-52, 2-59)
Steering wheel switch (P. 2-18, 2-33)
Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)
Warning and indicators lights (P. 2-9)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-18,
5.
Cruise control switches (P. 5-59)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
6.
7.
8.
9.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-50)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
Front passenger air bag status light
10.
11.
Front passenger supplemental air bag
12.
13.
Front passenger supplemental knee air
14.
15.
Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-11)
16.
Climate controls (P. 4-32, 4-40)
17.
Driver supplemental knee air bag
18.
Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-26)
19.
20.
Fuel filler door release (P. 3-23)
21.
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-58)
For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Instruments and controls 2-3
METERS AND GAUGES
1.
Tachometer
2.
Warning and indicator lights
3.
Vehicle information display
4.
Speedometer
5.
Fuel gauge
6.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
2-4 Instruments and controls
LIC4212
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.
LIC2218
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.
LIC4056
4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer eter
O and the twin trip odomare displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.
LIC4416
7 inch (18 cm) Type B (if so equipped)
Changing the display
Push the TRIP/RESET switch (located on the instrument panel) to change the display as follows:
TRIP A → TRIP B → ODO → TRIP A
Resetting the trip odometer
Press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second to reset the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.
Instruments and controls 2-5
LIC4365
4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not rev the engine into the red zone .
LIC4602
7 inch (18 cm) Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
NOTE:
LIC3427
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the reading is within the zone shown in the illustration.
2-6 Instruments and controls
The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates a coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, see “If your vehicle overheats”
LIC2222
FUEL GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates the fuel-filler location.
CAUTION
• If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips. the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• For additional information, see “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
Instruments and controls 2-7
DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
Displays the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consumption.
Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the actual distance that can be driven.
DTE display will change to “---” when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).
NOTE:
• The DTE value after refill is estimated based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added.
• If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated.
• Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the estimated
DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, seasonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).
2-8 Instruments and controls
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Warning/Indicator light (red) or Brake warning light
Charge warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Master warning light
Seat belt warning light and chime
Supplemental air bag warning light
Warning/Indicator light (yellow) or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
Automatic Emergency Braking with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
(if so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light
Low tire pressure warning light
Master warning light
Power steering warning light
Rear Automatic Braking system warning light (if so equipped)
Slip indicator light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light
Warning/Indicator light (other)
ECO mode indicator light (green)
Front fog light indicator light
(if so equipped) (green)
High Beam Assist indicator light (green)
(if so equipped)
High beam indicator light (blue)
Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)
Instruments and controls 2-9
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:
, , , , , or
The following lights (if so equipped) will come on briefly and then go off:
, or , , , ,
If any light does not come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm)
Type A” (P. 2-18), or “Vehicle information dis-
play 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32).
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see “Vehicle information
display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” (P. 2-18) or
2-10 Instruments and controls
“Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm)
or Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional infor-
mation, see “Brake fluid” (P. 8-10).
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
• Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
• Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
• If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.
Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, see “Engine oil”
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, see “Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test”
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
• MIL on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected.
Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel
Cap warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
• MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.
Instruments and controls 2-11
The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display:
• Parking brake release warning
• Door open (when vehicle is moving) warning
• Service CVT Stop safely warning
• Shift to P (Park) position warning
For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A”
(P. 2-18) or “Vehicle information display 7
inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32).
2-12 Instruments and controls
Seat belt warning light and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten the driver and front passenger seat belts.
The rear seats are also equipped with a seat belt warning light.
For additional information, see “Seat belts”
Supplemental air bag warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing.
• The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
• The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
• The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly. For additional information, see “Supplemental re-
straint system (SRS)” (P. 1-43).
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
(yellow)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see “Vehicle information
display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” (P. 2-18) or
“Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm)
or Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information,
see “Brake system” (P. 5-127).
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-91) and “Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-103).
Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.
For additional information, see “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” (P. 1-54).
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
Instruments and controls 2-13
For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A”
(P. 2-18), “Vehicle information display 7 inch
(18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32) and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5).
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The “Tire Pressure Low— Add Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and
WARNING
• Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
• If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the
TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2-14 Instruments and controls
• When using a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
• Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
CAUTION
• The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.
• If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.
• Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display:
• Low washer fluid warning
• Loose fuel cap warning
• Low tire pressure warning
• Emergency brake warning
• Lock warning
• Shipping mode warning
• Door/Trunk open warning (when vehicle is moving)
• LED Headlight system warning (if so equipped)
• Chassis Control system fault warning (if so equipped)
• Service CVT warnings
• Service engine warnings
• Rear emergency braking warning (If so equipped)
• Parking sensor error warning
• Driver Attention Alert warning (if so equipped)
• ITS system malfunction warning
• Traffic Sign Recognition warnings (if so equipped)
• I-Key system warnings
For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A”
(P. 2-18) or “Vehicle information display 7
inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32).
Power steering warning light
WARNING
• If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
• When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-15
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the power steering system is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see “Power
Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB) system warning light
(if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
2-16 Instruments and controls
This light illuminates when the RAB system is turned off in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the RAB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see
“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-84).
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery.
You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
The indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on have the system checked. it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC is turned off in the vehicle information display. This indicates the VDC has been turned off.
Turn the VDC on using the vehicle information display, or by restarting the engine. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-129).
The VDC light also comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The light will turn off after a period of time if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the indicator light while you are driving, have the VDC system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
VDC should remain on unless freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.
While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
(other)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see “Vehicle information
display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A” (P. 2-18) or
“Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm)
ECO mode indicator light
(green) (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ECO mode has been selected. For additional informa-
tion, see “ECO mode switch” (P. 5-24).
Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)
(green)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, see “Fog light
High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.
For additional information, see “Headlight
and turn signal switch” (P. 2-52).
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlight position is selected. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found.
• The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors and trunk.
• The Intelligent Key is taken outside the vehicle when operating the vehicle.
Instruments and controls 2-17
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 4.2
INCH (11 cm) TYPE A (if so equipped)
• Any doors are not closed securely when locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to zero.
LIC2630
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
• Vehicle settings
• Trip computer information
• Drive system warnings and settings
• Cruise control system information
• NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information
• Indicators and warnings
LIC3566
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be changed using the ,
, and OK buttons located on the steering wheel.
- Use these buttons to navigate the vehicle information display.
OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle information display.
— Returns to the previous menu.
2-18 Instruments and controls
The OK, and buttons also control audio and control panel functions in some conditions. Most screens and menus offer instruction prompts of the steering switch buttons to indicate how to control the vehicle information display. The
OK button changes the audio source and the buttons also control voice recognition manual mode. The OK button can be used to change the audio source when the audio screen is displayed. The buttons can be used when controlling voice recognition prompts manually. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON position the screens that display in the vehicle information include:
• Active system status (if so equipped)
• Trip computer
• Fuel economy
• Warnings
• Outside air temperature
• Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer
Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display warnings and
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display:
• VDC Setting
• Driver Assistance
• ECO Mode Setting
• TPMS Settings
• Clock
• Vehicle Settings
• Maintenance
• Customize Display
• Unit
• Language
• Factory Reset
VDC Setting
The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.
System
Menu item Explanation
Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
Instruments and controls 2-19
Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Emergency Brake
Menu item
Front
Rear
Lane
Lane Departure Warning
Blind Spot
Blind Spot (BSW)
Speed Limit Sign
Parking Aids
Display
Rear Sensor
Distance
Volume
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Attention Alert
Chassis Control
Explanation
Displays available emergency braking options.
Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see “Automatic
Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic
Displays available lane options.
Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Lane De-
parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-29).
Displays available blind spot options.
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Blind Spot
Allows user to turn the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system on or off. For additional information, see “Traffic Sign
Displays available parking aids.
Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off.
Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short.
Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low.
Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-48).
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) on or off. For additional information, see “Intelligent Driver
Displays available chassis control options.
2-20 Instruments and controls
ECO Mode Setting
The ECO mode setting menu allows the user to change the settings for the ECO mode.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item
ECO Customize
Cruise Control
Air Conditioning
ECO Info Settings
ECO Indicator
ECO Drive Report
View History
Explanation
Displays available ECO mode settings.
Allows user to set the Cruise Control mode to Normal or ECO. For additional information, see “Cruise Control”
Allows user to set the Air Conditioning mode to Normal or ECO. For additional information, see “Heater and air
Displays available ECO information settings.
Allows user to turn the ECO indicator on or off.
Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report on or off.
Displays the history report for the vehicle.
TPMS Settings
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.
Menu item
TPMS Setting
Tire Pressure Unit
Clock
Menu item
Clock
Explanation
Displays available TPMS settings.
Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.
Explanation
Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include automatically setting the time, 12H/24H format and manually setting the time. If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Instruments and controls 2-21
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the lighting and locking settings.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item
Lighting
Auto Headlight
Turn on earliest
Turn on earlier
Turn on standard
Turn on later
Locking
Selective Unlock
Auto Door Unlock
Shift to Park
IGN OFF
OFF
Horn beeps on lock
Wipers
Speed Dependent
Rear Door Alert
Explanation
Displays the available option for lighting.
Displays the auto headlight options.
Allows user to enable the turn on earliest setting.
Allows user to enable the turn on earlier setting.
Allows user to enable the turn on standard setting.
Allows user to enable the turn on later setting.
Displays the available locking options.
Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When the door handle request switch on the front passenger’s door is pushed to be unlocked, all the doors will be unlocked. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Displays the auto door unlock options.
Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Allows the user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Menu item
Horn & Alert
Alert Only
OFF
When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds.
Explanation
When selected, only the alert is displayed.
When selected, no alert or horn will be active.
Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional informa-
affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks.
Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.
Menu item
Maintenance
Oil Control System
Oil and Filter
Tire
Other
Displays various maintenance reminder options.
Explanation
Allows user to reset the current interval. This should only be done after completing oil change maintenance.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Instruments and controls 2-23
Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item
Main menu selection
Speed
Blank
Fuel Economy
ECO Pedal Guide
Drive Computer
TPMS
TSR
Audio
Driving Aids
Welcome Effect
Gauges
Animation
Light/Wiper
Headlights mode guidance
Wiper mode guidance
Explanation
Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the ECO pedal guide on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the TSR screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Displays the available welcome effect settings.
Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off.
Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off.
Displays the available light and wiper guidance settings.
Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off.
Allows user to turn the wiper mode guidance on or off.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Unit
The unit menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.
Mileage/Fuel
Tire Pressure
Temperature
Menu item
Displays the available mileage display units.
Displays the available mileage display units.
Displays the available temperature display units.
Explanation
Language
The language menu allows the user to change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display.
Language
Menu item Explanation
Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Factory Reset
Menu item Explanation
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.
Instruments and controls 2-25
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
The following messages may appear in your vehicle information display.
Engine start operation for
Intelligent Key system (if
I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, see “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-
Key Battery Low
This indicator appears when the Intelligent
Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. For additional infor-
mation, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22).
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
Key System Error: See
Owner’s Manual
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this warning appears for a period of time and then turns off.
The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the warning appears while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If the warning appears while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
No Key Press and hold to
Stop Engine
This message appears when the Intelligent key is not detected and the engine should be turned off.
Rotate Steering Wheel and
Push Start Switch
This indicator appears when the steering lock cannot be released.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.
2-26 Instruments and controls
• Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time. If this message does not automatically turn off, it is not a malfunction.
• Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select “Disable Alert” to disable the selected alert for the remainder of the current trip.
WARNING
Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see
“How to use the vehicle information dis-
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Check Rear Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see
“How to use the vehicle information dis-
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Door/Trunk Open
This warning appears when a door has been opened.
Drive sport mode indicator
A small “S” appears to the right of the Transmission Shift Position indicator in the vehicle information display when the drive sport mode is engaged.
Activate the drive sport mode by pushing the switch on the shift lever while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position.
For additional information, see “Drive sport
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual
This warning appears when the LED headlights are not functioning properly.
If this warning appears, have your system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Illumination indicator
This indicator appears when the vehicle information display screen brightness is being adjusted.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional in-
formation, see “Fuel-filler cap” (P. 3-23)
Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).
There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Oil Pressure: See
Owner’s Manual
This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level.
The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional informa-
tion, see “Engine oil” (P. 8-6).
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or
Fahrenheit. For additional information, see
Low Washer Fluid
This warning appears when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.
Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.
For additional information, see
“Windshield-washer fluid” (P. 8-11).
Outside Temperature
Display
The outside temperature display appears in the center region of the vehicle information display.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see “Push-button ignition switch
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, see “Push-button igni-
tion switch positions” (P. 5-12).
Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
Push clutch and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
2-28 Instruments and controls
Rear seat belt reminder
This warning appears for 35 seconds after the ignition is placed in the ON position and the engine is started.
This warning message shows the status of the three rear seat belts. When one of the rear seat belts are buckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear grey. When one of the rear seat belts are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear red.
After a change in buckle status, a chime will sound and the warning will appear for another 35 seconds.
Release Parking Brake
This warning appears when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Reminder: Turn OFF
Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the
OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal
Shift to Park
This warning appears when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, see “Extended stor-
age switch” (P. 2-66), and/or “Fuses” (P. 8-19).
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning
light” (P. 2-13) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Transmission Shift Position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.
CVT (AT) hot Power reduced
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be reduced.
Instruments and controls 2-29
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation; or have it repaired if necessary.
CVT (AT) Malfunction
Service now
This warning appears when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine Oil Service due in – –
– km
This distance to oil change is displayed if the distance to oil change is less than 100 km (62 miles).
Automatic Emergency
Braking with Pedestrian
Detection warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-91) and “Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-103).
BSW/RCTA indicator
This indicator appears when the BSW system is engaged.
For additional information, see “Blind Spot
BSW/RCTA System
Malfunction: See Owner’s
Manual
This warning appears when the Blind Spot
Warning/Rear Cross Traffic Alert systems are not functioning properly. For additional information, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)”
(P. 5-36) and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)”
Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
When cruise control is activated, a green circle will appear to indicate it is set. The vehicle information display will also display the speed the cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed. If cruise control is on and canceled, the speed will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle will return to if the resume button is activated.
Currently not available
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled:
• When the VDC operates
• When a wheel slips
• When the VDC system is turned off
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and
VDC system is off.)
2-30 Instruments and controls
Driver Attention Alert
Malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Driver Alertness system is not functioning properly. For additional information, see “In-
telligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” (P. 5-118).
Driver Attention Alert—
Take a Break?
This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Manual
This message appears when the front radar sensor may be obstructed due to:
• mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc.
• inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
All forward driving aids are temporarily disabled until the system detects that the front radar sensor is no longer obstructed.
For additional information, see:
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-91)
• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-
ECO mode indicator
This indicator appears when the ECO mode is engaged.
For additional information, see “ECO mode
Intelligent Cruise Control
(ICC) indicators
These indicators show the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) indicator
This indicator appears when the LDW system is engaged.
For additional information, see “Lane De-
parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-29).
Not Available Poor Road Conditions
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled:
• When the VDC operates
• When a wheel slips
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.)
Not Available System Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly.
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-61), “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-36) or “Lane Departure
Parking Sensor Error: See
Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional informa-
tion, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-134).
Instruments and controls 2-31
Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB) system warning indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see
“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-84).
Side Radar Obstruction
This message appears when the Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, see “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-36) and “Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-48).
Speed Limit Sign indicator
This message may appear when the Traffic
Sign Recognition system is engaged.
For additional information, see “Traffic Sign
System Fault
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see
“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-84).
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY– 7
INCH (18 cm) TYPE B (if so equipped)
Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recog-
Unavailable: High Camera
Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104°F (40°C). For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)”
Vehicle ahead detection indicator
This indicator appears when the following systems are engaged and have detected a vehicle:
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-91) and “Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-103).
LIC3224
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
• Vehicle settings
• Drive computer information
• Drive system warnings and settings
• Cruise control system information
• NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information
• Indicators and warnings
• Tire pressure information
• Audio information
• Bluetooth® Hands-free Phone information
2-32 Instruments and controls
• Driving Aids
• Odometer/twin trip odometer
• Distance to empty
• Clock and outside temperature
LIC3566
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be changed using the ,
, and OK buttons located on the steering wheel.
- Use these buttons to navigate the vehicle information display.
OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle information display.
— Returns to the previous menu.
The OK, and buttons also control audio and control panel functions in some conditions. Most screens and menus offer instruction prompts of the steering switch buttons to indicate how to control the vehicle information display.
Dots on the right side of the vehicle information display may appear if there is more than one page of menu items or warning messages, depending on the type of meter. The OK button changes the audio source and the buttons also control voice recognition manual mode. The
OK button can be used to change the audio source when the audio screen is displayed. The buttons can be used when controlling voice recognition prompts manually. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON position the vehicle information display may display the following screens (if so equipped):
• Home
• Drive Computer — Speed, Fuel Economy,
Trip Distance & Time
• Convenience
Instruments and controls 2-33
• Digital speed and average speed
• Instant fuel economy/ average fuel economy
• Tire Pressure
• Audio/telephone
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
• Speed Limit Sign
• Driving Aids
• Settings
• Warnings*
*Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display warnings and
To control what items display in the vehicle information display, see “How to use the
vehicle information display” (P. 2-33).
RESETTING THE DRIVE COMPUTER
The drive computer is divided across three screens:
• Average Speed
• Average Fuel Economy
• Trip Distance & Time
1. Press the buttons until you reach the desired drive computer mode.
2. Press and hold the OK button for approximately 1 second to reset the information on the currently displayed screen.
NOTE:
If you wish to reset all drive computer values at once, press and hold the OK button for approximately 3 seconds until a reset menu appears; and follow the instructions.
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display. It also allows you to change vehicle functions:
• VDC Setting
• Driver Assistance
• ECO Mode Setting
• TPMS Setting
• Clock
• Vehicle Settings
• Maintenance
• Customize Display
• Unit/Language
• Factory Reset
VDC Setting
The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.
System
Menu item Explanation
Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
2-34 Instruments and controls
Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Lane
Menu item Explanation
Displays available lane options.
Lane Departure Warning Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Lane Departure
Blind Spot
Blind Spot Warning
Emergency Brake
Front
Rear
Speed Limit Sign
Parking Aids
Auto Show Sonar
Rear
Distance
Volume
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Displays available blind spot options.
Displays available emergency braking options.
Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see “Automatic Emergency
Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking
Allows user to turn the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system on or off. For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recognition
Displays available parking aids.
Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off.
Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short.
Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low.
Driver Attention Alert
Timer Alert
Low Temperature Alert
Chassis Control
Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) on or off. For additional information, see “Intelligent Driver Alertness
Allows user to set the timer alert.
Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.
Displays available chassis control options.
Instruments and controls 2-35
ECO Mode Setting
The ECO mode setting menu allows the user to change the settings for the ECO mode.
Menu item
ECO Mode Customize
Cruise Control
Air Conditioning
ECO Drive Assist
ECO Indicator
ECO Drive Report
View History
Explanation
Displays available ECO mode settings.
Allows user to turn the Air Conditioning mode on or off. For additional information, see “Heater and air conditioner”
Displays available ECO information settings.
Allows user to turn the ECO indicator on or off.
Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report on or off.
Displays the history report for the vehicle.
TPMS Setting
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to view or change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.
Menu item
TPMS Setting
Tire Pressure Unit
Clock
Clock
Menu item
Explanation
Displays available tire pressure settings.
Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.
Explanation
Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include manually setting the time, 12H/24H format, and time zone (if so equipped).
The clock can also be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item
Lighting
Welcome Headlight
Auto Room Lamp
Auto Headlight
Turn on earliest
Turn on earlier
Turn on standard
Turn on later
Turn indicator
3 Flashes
Continuous
Locking
Ext. Door Switch
Selective Unlock
Auto Door Unlock
Shift to P
IGN OFF
OFF
Explanation
Displays the available lighting options.
Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.
Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.
Displays the auto headlight options.
Allows user to enable the turn on earliest setting.
Allows user to enable the turn on earlier setting.
Allows user to enable the turn on standard setting.
Allows user to enable the turn on later setting.
Displays the available turn indicator options.
Allows user to turn 3 flash pass feature on or off.
Allows user to adjust the continuous feature.
Displays the available locking options.
Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.
Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When the door handle request switch on the front passenger’s door is pushed to be unlocked, all the doors will be unlocked. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Displays the auto door unlock options.
Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into Park.
Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Menu item
Horn beeps on lock
Wipers
Speed Dependent
Rear Door Alert
Horn & Alert
Alert Only
OFF
Explanation
Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Displays the available wiper options.
Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off.
Displays the available Rear Door Alert options.
When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds.
When selected, only the alert is displayed.
When selected, no alert or horn will be active.
Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional informa-
affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks.
Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.
Menu item
Maintenance
Oil Control System
Oil and Filter
Tire
Other
Displays various maintenance reminder options.
Explanation
Allows user to reset the current interval. This should only be done after completing oil change maintenance.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item
Main Menu Selection
Home
Speed
Blank
Fuel Economy
ECO Pedal Guide
Drive Computer
TPMS
Speed Limit Sign
Audio
Driving Aids
Cruise
Chassis Control
Cruise Screen Transition
Welcome Effect
Gauges
Animation
Light/Wiper Guidance
Lights mode guidance
Wiper mode guidance
Explanation
Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the ECO Pedal guide screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the TSR screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the audio controls screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the cruise control screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allow user to turn the cruise screen transition on or off.
Displays the available welcome effect settings.
Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off.
Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off.
Displays the available light and wiper guidance settings.
Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off.
Allows user to turn the wiper mode guidance on or off.
Instruments and controls 2-39
Unit/Language
The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.
Mileage/Fuel
Tire Pressure
Temperature
Language
Menu item Explanation
Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display.
Allows user to select the tire pressure display units.
Allows user to select the temperature display units.
Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Factory Reset
Menu item Explanation
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.
2-40 Instruments and controls
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
The following messages may appear in your vehicle information display.
Engine start operation for
Intelligent Key system (if
I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, see “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-
Key Battery Low
This indicator appears when the Intelligent
Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. For additional infor-
mation, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-22).
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
Key System Error: See
Owner’s Manual
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this warning appears for a period of time and then turns off.
The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the warning appears while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If the warning appears while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
No Key Press and hold to
Stop Engine
This message appears when the Intelligent key is not detected and the engine should be turned off.
Brightness indicator
This indicator appears when the vehicle information display screen brightness is being adjusted.
Chassis Control System Error: See
Owner’s Manual
This warning appears if there is an error in the Chassis Control system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see “Chassis Con-
Instruments and controls 2-41
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.
• Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time. If this message does not automatically turn off, it is not a malfunction.
• Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select “Disable Alert” to disable the selected alert for the remainder of the current trip.
WARNING
Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see
“How to use the vehicle information dis-
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Check Rear Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see
“How to use the vehicle information dis-
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Door/Trunk Open
This warning appears when a door has been opened.
Drive sport mode indicator
A small “S” appears to the right of the Transmission Shift Position indicator in the vehicle information display when the drive sport mode is engaged.
Activate the drive sport mode by pushing the switch on the shift lever while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position.
For additional information, see “Drive sport
Headlight System Error See Owner’s
Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional in-
formation, see “Fuel-filler cap” (P. 3-23)
2-42 Instruments and controls
Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).
There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or
Fahrenheit. For additional information, see
Low Washer Fluid
This warning appears when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.
Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.
For additional information,
“Windshield-washer fluid” (P. 8-11).
see
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see “Push-button
ignition switch positions” (P. 5-12).
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, see “Push-button igni-
tion switch positions” (P. 5-12).
Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator also appears when the vehicle has been started using the Remote
Engine Start (if so equipped) function.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
Push Ignition to OFF
After the Push Ignition to OFF warning appears, the warning will appear if the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC position when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position.
Rear seat belt reminder
This warning appears for 35 seconds after the ignition is placed in the ON position and the engine is started.
This warning message shows the status of the three rear seat belts. When one of the rear seat belts are buckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear grey. When one of the rear seat belts are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear red.
After a change in buckle status, a chime will sound and the warning will appear for another 35 seconds.
Release Parking Brake
This warning appears when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Reminder: Turn
OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the
OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal
Instruments and controls 2-43
Rotate Steering Wheel and
Push Start Switch
This indicator appears when the steering lock cannot be released.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.
Shift to Park
This warning appears when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, see “Extended stor-
age switch” (P. 2-66), and/or “Fuses” (P. 8-19).
Timer Alert — Time for a break?
This indicator appears when the set time is reached. The time can be set up to six hours. For additional information, see “Set-
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning
light” (P. 2-13) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Transmission Shift Position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.
CVT (AT) hot Power reduced
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be reduced.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation; or have it repaired if necessary.
2-44 Instruments and controls
CVT (AT) Malfunction
Service now
This warning appears when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine hot Power reduced
This engine has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of engine damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be reduced.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the engine to return to normal operation; or have it repaired if necessary.
Engine Malfunction: Power Reduced
Service now
This warning appears when the engine is not operating under normal conditions. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine Malfunction Service now
This warning appears when there is a problem with the engine. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine Oil Service due in – –
– km
This distance to oil change is displayed if the distance to oil change is less than 100 km (62 miles).
Engine Stalled: Stop safely
This message appears 30 seconds before the vehicle is shut down due to an above normal operating exhaust temperature.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and malfunction warning (red) will illuminate.
Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer immediately for this service.
Automatic Emergency
Braking with Pedestrian
Detection warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-91) and “Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-103).
Instruments and controls 2-45
BSW/RCTA indicator
This indicator appears when the BSW system is engaged.
For additional information, see “Blind Spot
Currently not available
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled:
• When the VDC operates
• When a wheel slips
• When the VDC system is turned off
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and
VDC system is off.)
Driver Attention Alert
Malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Driver Alertness system is not functioning properly. For additional information, see “In-
telligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” (P. 5-118).
Driver Attention Alert—
Take a Break?
This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.
Forward Driving Aids Temporarily
Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See
Owner’s Manual
This message appears when the front radar sensor may be obstructed due to:
• mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc.
• inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
All forward driving aids are temporarily disabled until the system detects that the front radar sensor is no longer obstructed.
For additional information, see the following (if so equipped):
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-91)
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (P. 5-61)
• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-
Intelligent Cruise Control
(ICC) indicators
These indicators show the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) indicator
This indicator appears when the LDW system is engaged.
For additional information, see “Lane De-
parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-29).
Malfunction
This warning appears when the Automatic
Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system or Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW) system is not functioning properly.
If one or more of these warnings appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-91) or “Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-103).
2-46 Instruments and controls
Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems are not functioning properly:
• Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Not Available Poor Road Conditions
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled:
• When the VDC operates
• When a wheel slips
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates and wheel slip).
Not Available System Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly.
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-61), “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-36) or “Lane Departure
Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s
Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional informa-
tion, see “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P. 5-134).
Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB) system warning indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see
“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-84).
Speed Limit Sign indicator
This message may appear when the Traffic
Sign Recognition system is engaged.
For additional information, see “Traffic Sign
System Fault
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see
“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-84).
Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recog-
Unavailable: High Camera
Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104°F (40°C). For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)”
Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction
This message appears when the Blind
Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, see “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-36) or “Rear Cross Traf-
Instruments and controls 2-47
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Vehicle ahead detection indicator
This indicator appears when the following systems are engaged and have detected a vehicle:
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)
For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-91) and “Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-103).
LIC0301
Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:
• Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
• NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The system helps detect vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended.
Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if so equipped).
The system can be armed even if the windows and moonroof are open.
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
2-48 Instruments and controls
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the
Intelligent Key, door handle request switch (if so equipped) or power door lock switch.
4. Wait 30 seconds for the system to complete the pre-armed phase.
If during the pre-armed phase one of the following occurs, the system will not arm:
• Any door is unlocked with the Intelligent Key or door request switch (if so equipped).
• The ignition switch is placed in the
AUTO ACC or ON position.
• Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate when all the doors, hood and trunk are locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
• The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.
• The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver's door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key.
The alarm is activated by:
• opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking a door or the trunk, pressing the button on the Intelligent Key, or pushing the request switch (if so equipped) on the driver's or passenger's door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Instruments and controls 2-49
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
LIC4896
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
• Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
• Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.
• Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshieldwasher fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshieldwasher fluid concentrate and water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
2-50 Instruments and controls
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
O
(faster) or
O
(slower). Also, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed.
(For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent speed will be faster.)
䊊
䊊
Low — continuous low speed operation
High — continuous high speed operation
Push the lever up
O to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you O to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
NOTE:
The Wiper with Speed feature may be disabled. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11
cm) Type A” (P. 2-18) or “Vehicle informa-
tion display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B”
LIC4039
To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-51
CAUTION
• Use the defroster when the engine is running to avoid discharging the battery.
• When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
LIC2634
Type A (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
Rotate the switch to the position, and the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on. The will illuminate in the meter.
Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.
LIC2635
Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
2-52 Instruments and controls
Type C (if so equipped)
LIC4237
Type D (if so equipped)
LIC4498 LIC2636
Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:
• Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
• Turn off all the lights when it is light.
• Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and all doors are closed.
Instruments and controls 2-53
To turn on the autolight system:
1.
For USA: Turn the headlight switch to the
AUTO position .
For CAN: Turn the headlight switch to the
AUTO or position.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, timer continues.
To turn the autolight system off:
For USA: Turn the switch to the OFF (if so equipped), , or position.
For CAN: Turn the switch to the position.
The headlights will turn on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously).
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights will remain on for 1 minute.
LIC4417
Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top side O of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle's battery could become discharged.
LIC2637
Headlight beam select
To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on and the light illuminates in the meter.
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.
2-54 Instruments and controls
High Beam Assist
The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically.
WARNING
• The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manually when necessary.
• The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).
– When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.
– When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.
– When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness.
– When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.
– When driving on a road with many curves.
– When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.
– When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
– When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.
– When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc.
• The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations.
– The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.
– The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.
– When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.
– When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.
– Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).
– The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.
Instruments and controls 2-55
LIC3696
High Beam Assist operation
To activate the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position
O and push the lever forward
(high beam position). The High Beam
Assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the headlights are turned on.
If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2-56 Instruments and controls
When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam.
To turn off the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the position or select the low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral position.
LSD3484
Ambient image sensor maintenance
The ambient image sensor
O for the High
Beam Assist system is located in front of the inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the windshield clean.
• Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.
If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Battery saver system
The light reminder chime will sound if the headlight switch is in either the or position and when the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position while the headlight switch is in the or position, the battery saver function will turn off the lights after a period of time to prevent the battery from being discharged.
Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the
OFF or AUTO position when you leave the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time to prevent the battery from being discharged.
LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The LED DRL automatically illuminate at
100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The LED
DRL operate with the headlight switch in the OFF (if so equipped), or AUTO position during day conditions.
For CAN: the LED
DRL can turn on when headlight is in the position during day conditions (rear position lights will turn on as well). When you turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination, the LED lights switch from LED DRL to the park function.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch on for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF or AUTO position.
WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
Instruments and controls 2-57
LIC4691
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
Press the “+” button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights.
Press the “-” button to decrease the brightness of instrument panel lights.
LIC2638
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Lane change signal
Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.
Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.
NOTE:
If the turn signal light bulb malfunctions, the turn signal indicator will flash at a higher frequency when the turn signal is activated.
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled.
For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type
A” (P. 2-18), or “Vehicle information dis-
play 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32).
2-58 Instruments and controls
HORN
LIC2639
Type A (if so equipped)
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the fog light switch to the position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.
LIC4500
Type B (if so equipped)
The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.
LIC3568
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the steering wheel.
Instruments and controls 2-59
HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)
LIC4904
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
• The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
• Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
• Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
• Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
• When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
• If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Push the switch until either two lights are illuminated for high setting, or one light is illuminated for low setting.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch to turn it off.
2-60 Instruments and controls
HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if so equipped)
LIC4030
The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below
68°F (20°C).
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68°F
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.
EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so equipped)
EMERGENCY SUPPORT
NissanConnect® Services provide various services to support dealing with emergencies of the subscribed vehicle and the driver.
For example, in case of an illness or serious injury, you can seek support by pressing the in-vehicle Emergency Call (SOS) button and connecting to the NissanConnect®
Services Response Center.
The
NissanConnect® Services Response Center can specify the location of the vehicle via GPS, and the information will be sent to the police or other agencies as needed.
For information about other
NissanConnect® Services emergency support related services, contact the
NissanConnect® Customer Support line at
1–855–426–6628 or refer to the
NissanConnect® Services website www.nissanusa.com/connect (for U.S.) or www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect (English) / www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr (French)
(for Canada).
Instruments and controls 2-61
WARNING
• Please note that the Automatic Collision Notification service and Emergency Call function cannot be used in the following conditions:
– Emergency functions and services will not be available without a paid subscription to Nissan-
Connect® Services.
– The NissanConnect® Services network system is disabled.
– The vehicle moves outside the service area where the TCU
(Telematics Control Unit) is connected to the system.
– The vehicle is outside the area where the cellular network service is receivable.
– The vehicle is in a location with poor signal reception such as tunnels, underground parking garages, behind buildings or in mountainous areas.
– The line is busy.
– The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) or other systems of your vehicle are not working properly.
– It may not be possible to make an emergency call depending on the severity of a collision and/or emergency.
• Park the vehicle in a safe location and set the parking brake before operating the Emergency Call (SOS) button.
• Only use this service in case of an emergency. There may be a penalty for inappropriate use of the service.
• Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Individuals who use a pacemaker should contact the device manufacturer regarding any possible effects before using the system.
• The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) antenna is installed inside the upper central part of the instrument panel.
An occupant should not get any closer to the antenna than specified by the pacemaker manufacturer. The radio waves from the TCU antenna may adversely affect the operation of the pacemaker while using the
NissanConnect® Services.
2-62 Instruments and controls
Making an emergency call
The Emergency Call (SOS) button is located near the map light under a cover.
1. Press the cover once O . The cover will drop down, exposing the Emergency call button.
2. Press the Emergency Call (SOS) button to make an emergency call.
3. When the line is connected, speak to the
Response Specialist.
LIC4213
If you want to cancel the emergency call, press and hold the Emergency Call (SOS) button for a few seconds.
NOTE:
• After the Emergency Call (SOS) button is pressed, it may take some time until the system initiates connection, depending on the technical environment and whether the TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is being used by the other services.
• An indicator light on the Emergency call (SOS) button shows the readiness of the emergency support system. If the indicator light is not illuminated, pressing the Emergency Call (SOS) button does not connect your vehicle to the Response Specialist. The indicator light blinks while connected to the
NissanConnect® Services Response
Center.
• Even when the indicator light is illuminated, connection to the Nissan-
Connect® Services Response Center may not be possible. If this occurs in an emergency situation, contact the authorities by other means.
• To avoid disconnecting the line, keep the engine running during an emergency call, if it is safe to do so.
Instruments and controls 2-63
REAR DOOR ALERT
The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A”
(P. 2-18) or “Vehicle information display 7
inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32).
When the system is enabled:
• The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed within 10 minutes of the vehicle being driven. When the driver door is closed and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see “Rear Door Alert is acti-
vated (P. 2-26) or “Rear Door Alert is acti-
• If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven within approximately 10 minutes, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven within 10 minutes for the system to activate.
When the Rear Door Alert system is activated:
• When the driver puts the vehicle in the P
(Park) position, a notification message appears in the vehicle information display with the options to “Dismiss Message” or “Disable Alert” if desired.
• Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily disable for that stop.
• No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will keep the alert enabled for that stop.
• If the alert is enabled when a driver exits the vehicle, a message will appear in the vehicle information display that states
“Check Back Seat For All Articles.”
If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected:
• An audible horn sound will occur after a short time unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert.
• If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound.
• If the trunk is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the trunk is closed.
NOTE:
If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the message alert will still be shown in the vehicle information display but the horn will not sound.
WARNING
• If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no audible alert will be provided regardless of rear door open/close status.
• There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, this may occur if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip.
• The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).
NOTE:
There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or passengers in the rear seat(s).
2-64 Instruments and controls
POWER OUTLET
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Alert is activated (P. 2-26) or “Rear Door Alert
LIC4337
The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. It is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The power outlet is powered only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
CAUTION
• The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.
• Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
• Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
• Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
• Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
• Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
• Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
• When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.
Instruments and controls 2-65
USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT (if so equipped)
EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
LHA5413
There is a USB/iPod® charging port located on the rear center console. This port will charge compatible devices.
NOTE:
Only the USB connection port located below the instrument panel will allow operation of the USB/iPod® devices through the audio system.
LIC4391
The extended storage switch is used when the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is located in the fuse panel to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.
Pulled position
LIC4392
2-66 Instruments and controls
STORAGE
Pushed position
LIC4393
Front door pockets
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
LIC4963 LIC1328
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the back of the passenger's seat. The pockets can be used to store maps.
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the driver’s and/or front passenger’s NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), please observe the following items:
Instruments and controls 2-67
• Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest.
• Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest, or in the seatback pocket.
LIC4338
Storage Trays (if so equipped)
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.
LIC4551
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
2-68 Instruments and controls
CAUTION
• Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.
• Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.
LIC1026
CONSOLE BOX
To open the console box, press in on the lever and raise the lid .
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.
LIC4905
OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help prevent an accident.
Instruments and controls 2-69
Front cup holders
CUP HOLDERS
LIC4339 LIC2656
Rear cup holders (if so equipped)
CAUTION
• Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
• Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
Front bottle holder
Soft bottle holder
LIC4965
2-70 Instruments and controls
WINDOWS
LIC4964
Rear bottle holder
CAUTION
• Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.
• Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
• Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.
LIC3208
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side switch
4. Right rear passenger side
5. Left rear passenger side
6. Driver side automatic switch
Driver's side power window switch
The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.
Instruments and controls 2-71
To open a window, push the switch and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached.
Locking passengers' windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver's side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.
LIC2309
Front passenger's power window switch
The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's window. To open the window, push the switch and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached
O
. To close the window, pull the switch and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached .
LIC2663
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down switch up
O . To close the window, pull the
.
2-72 Instruments and controls
LIC4340
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically closes all the way. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing.
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. Have the power window autoreverse system re-initialized. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
When power window switch does not operate
If the power window automatic function
(closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete.
The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.
If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-73
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
LIC4249
POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The power moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC or OFF position. If the driver's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the switch to the open
O or closed
O position and release it; it need not be held.
2-74 Instruments and controls
The roof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push the switch once more while it is opening or closing.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the switch O and release it; it need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down position
O
.
Resetting the moonroof switch
If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to the closed position .
2. Push and hold the switch to the closed position for approximately 15 seconds.
3. Release the switch after the moonroof moves up, down, then back to the full tilt up position.
4. Push and hold the switch to the closed position .
5. Release the switch after the moonroof completes one full cycle from the tilt up position to the closed position, then to the open position, and again to the fully closed position.
6. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will fully close gradually.
Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof.
WARNING
• In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
• Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.
CAUTION
• Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening.
• Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LIC4906
The interior light can be turned on regardless of door position. The light will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position when any door is opened.
The interior lights can be set to operate when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a door is open, push the switch; the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position.
The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or the driver's door is closed and locked.
Instruments and controls 2-75
NOTE:
The step lights (if so equipped) illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
LIC4907
MAP LIGHTS
To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To turn them off, push the switches again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
LIC4041
PERSONAL LIGHTS
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
2-76 Instruments and controls
TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The light will go off after a period of time if the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
For additional information, see “Exterior
and interior lights” (P. 8-26).
Instruments and controls 2-77
MEMO
2-78 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Troubleshooting guide (Continuously
Variable Transmission only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Transmission only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-18
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Trunk lid release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Interior trunk access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
KEYS
LPD2874
Type A (if so equipped)
1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)
2. Mechanical key
3. Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2875
Type B (if so equipped)
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the
Intelligent Key components, when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent
Keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
• Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
• Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.
• Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
• Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
• Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
SPA1951
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver's door.
For additional information, see “Doors”
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any virtual key accessories (if so equipped) will also have to be registered. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
DOORS
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.
When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
• Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
• Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2919
Driver's side
LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock the door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle
O
. This will only lock the corresponding door and will not activate the security system. To arm the security system, press the button on the Intelligent Key.
To unlock the corresponding door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle O . This will only unlock the corresponding door and will not disarm the security system.
For additional information, see “Security
LPD2862
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position , then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position
.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
LPD2309
Driver’s and passenger’s side
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) to the lock position O . When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) to the unlock position .
Lockout protection
When any door is open and the power door lock switch is moved to the lock position, all doors will lock. If the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle after all the doors are closed, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
• All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (25 km/h).
• Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P
(Park) or OFF position.
• Manual transmission (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can be changed using the “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type
A” (P. 2-18) or “Vehicle information dis-
play 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32).
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
LPD3085
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position
O the door can be opened from the outside
, or the inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position O the door can be opened only from the
, outside.
WARNING
• Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
• The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch (if so equipped) on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.
CAUTION
• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.
• Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions:
• When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
• When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver or a CB radio.
• When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.
• When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.
• When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “Battery replacement”
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
• Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
• Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.
• Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
• Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
• Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2402
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch (if so equipped) .
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch (if so equipped)
O
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches (if so equipped) may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch (if so equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.
LPD2554
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
• Do not push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent
Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent
Key is outside the vehicle.
• After locking with the door handle request switch (if so equipped), verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
• To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.
• Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped). The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.
LPD3086
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors and trunk lid without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors and trunk lid by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) within the range of operation.
Locking doors
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD3087
LPD2401
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission only) or the N (Neutral) position and apply the parking brake (manual transmission only), place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch (if so equipped)
O while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside chime sounds twice.
NOTE:
• Doors and trunk lid lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped) while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
• Doors and trunk lid lock by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) while any door is open. Only driver door lock with mechanical key even if any door is open.
• Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle; a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.
WARNING
After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.
CAUTION
• When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch
(if so equipped) to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
• The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors are locked and then the Intelligent
Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock. A chime will sound to warn you. However, if an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle with all the doors closed, the doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:
• When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.
• When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
LPD3087
Unlocking doors
Driver’s door
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) .
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside chime sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) O again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors and the trunk lid.
LPD2165
Except driver’s door
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch (if so equipped)
O to unlock all doors.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside chime sounds once.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
All doors and trunk lid will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the request switch (if so equipped):
• Opening any door or the trunk lid.
• Pushing the ignition switch.
Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the interior lights switch is not in the OFF position.
The interior lights can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
• Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Locking the doors with the request switch (if so equipped) or the Intelligent
Key.
• Switching the interior light switch to the
OFF position.
For additional information, see “Interior
LPD3088
Opening the trunk lid
1. Push the trunk opener request switch (if so equipped)
O while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound three times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:
• The Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.
• The doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely.
• The Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Type A (if so equipped)
1.
2.
3.
4.
(lock) button
(unlock) button
(trunk) button
(panic) button
LPD3601
2.
3.
4.
5.
LPD3603
Type B (if so equipped)
1.
(remote engine start) button
(lock) button
(unlock) button
(trunk) button
(panic) button
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the
Key.
button on the Intelligent
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors and the trunk will be locked.
WARNING
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key to unlock the driver’s door.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the button again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors and trunk.
All doors and trunk lid will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 60 seconds after pressing the button:
• Opening any doors or trunk lid.
• Pushing the ignition switch.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the interior lights switch is not in the OFF position.
The interior lights can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
• Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Locking the doors with the request switch (if so equipped) or the Intelligent
Key.
• Switching the interior light switch to the
OFF position.
For additional information, see “Interior
Releasing the trunk lid
Press the button for 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
•
• It has run for a period of time.
(unlock) button is pressed on the
Intelligent Key.
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the buttons for at least 4 seconds.
and
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 4 seconds once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, see “Trouble-
shooting guide” (P. 3-16) and “Vehicle infor-
mation display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A”
(P. 2-18) or “Vehicle information display 7
inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(Continuously Variable
Transmission only)
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.
When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine
Symptom
The Shift to Park warning light in the instrument panel illuminates and the inside chime sounds continuously.
When pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.
When closing the doors
When closing the trunk lid
When pushing the button on the
Intelligent Key to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few seconds and all the doors unlock.
The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or the trunk.
Possible Cause
The outside chime sounds 3 times.
The Shift to Park warning light in the instrument panel illuminates and the outside chime sounds continuously.
Few seconds after closing the driver’s door, the Rear Door Alert warning message appears on the display, the horn sounds six times, or a Check Rear Seat for All Articles warning appears on the display.
The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
The outside chime sounds for few seconds and the trunk lid opens.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.
The ignition switch is in the OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P
(Park) position.
The Rear Door Alert is activated.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or the trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or the trunk.
A door is not closed securely.
Remedy
Make sure that the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Make sure that the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Check the back seat for all articles, press the OK button to clear the Rear
Door Alert warning message.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the doors securely.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(Manual Transmission only)
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom
When the parking brake is fully applied
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
When pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.
When closing the doors
The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.
The Key System Error warning message in the vehicle information display appears, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
Possible Cause
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or the trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or the trunk.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.
Remedy
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
LPD2995
The button will be on the NISSAN
Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote
Engine Start. This feature allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected when the Remote Engine Start feature is used:
• Vehicles with a manual climate control system will default to the last used heating or cooling mode.
• Vehicles with an automatic climate control system may default to either a heating or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures.
For additional information, see “Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control”
Laws in some local communities may restrict or prohibit the use of the Remote
Engine Start, or the amount of time a parked engine may idle. For example, some laws require a person using Remote Engine
Start to have the vehicle in view or may restrict idling time except in freezing temperatures. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, see “Conditions the Re-
mote Engine Start will not work” (P. 3-20).
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
• Do not use Remote Engine Start in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.
REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature to start the engine perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the button to lock all doors.
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the button until the turn signal lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle is not within view press and hold the button for at least 2 seconds.
The following events will occur when the engine starts:
• The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
• The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
• The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, see “Extending engine
Press and hold the brake then push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position before driving. For additional infor-
mation, see “Driving the vehicle” (P. 5-16).
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”
(P. 3-19). Run time will be calculated as
follows:
• The first 10-minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.
• The second 10 minutes will start after the first Remote Engine Start request ends.
For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 20 minutes.
• Extending engine run time will bring you to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles.
The vehicle needs to be driven at speeds of
4 mph (7 km/h) before the Remote Engine
Start procedure can be used again.
CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following:
• Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and press until the parking lights turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.
• The extended engine run time has expired.
• The first 10 minute timer has expired.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• The shift lever is moved out of park.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
• The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is pushed without an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed.
• The accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The vehicle moves after a remote engine start. (The hazard indicator flashers blink once and the engine is stopped).
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE
START WILL NOT WORK
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:
• The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
• The hood is not securely closed.
• The hazard indicator lights are on.
• The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.
• The button is not pressed and held for at least 2 seconds.
• The button is not pressed and held within 5 seconds of pressing the lock button.
• The brake is pressed.
• The doors are not closed and locked.
• The trunk is open.
• The I-Key System Error warning or any engine-related warning shows in the vehicle information display.
• The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
• Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used. (To use the Remote Engine Start function again, the vehicle needs to be driven at speeds of 4 mph (7 km/h)).
• The vehicle is not in P (Park).
• There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm)
Type A” (P. 2-18) or “Vehicle information dis-
play 7 inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32).
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
HOOD
WARNING
• Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.
• If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
O located on the lower door pillar until the hood springs up slightly.
2. Locate the lever
O in between the hood and grille and push the lever sideways with your fingertips.
3. Raise the hood .
4. Remove the support rod
O and insert it into the slot marked by an arrow.
NOTE:
Do not place the support rod in a location other than the designated slot.
LPD3084
Hold the coated parts when removing or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the metal parts, as they may be hot immediately after the engine has been stopped.
When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
TRUNK LID
Instrument panel
TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH
WARNING
LPD2868
• Do not drive with the trunk lid open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
For additional information, see “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)”
• Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.
NOTE:
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelligent Key. For additional information,
see “Releasing the trunk lid” (P. 3-15).
LPD2081
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.
INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS
The trunk can be accessed from the driver’s side or the passenger side of the rear seat.
1. Move the front seat to the most forward position.
2. Pull up on the knob on the rear seatback.
3. Fold down the driver’s or passenger’s side seatback.
For additional information, see “Folding
WARNING
• Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
• When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
• Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
LPD3090
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuelfiller door securely.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
• Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
• Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.
• Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.
• Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
• Do not use E–15 or E–85 fuel in your vehicle. For additional information,
see “Fuel recommendation” (P. 10-4).
• The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message appears may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
• Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• For additional information, see “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
• If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3. Press the OK button on the steering wheel to turn off the Loose Fuel Cap warning after tightening the fuel-filler cap.
LPD3091
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.
LPD3029
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, do the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as previously described as soon as possible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS
WARNING
• Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
• Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.
LPD3092
TILT OPERATION
Pull the lock lever down O steering wheel up or down and adjust the to the desired position.
Push the lock lever up steering wheel in place.
firmly lock the
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Pull the lock lever down O and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward to the desired position.
Push the lock lever up steering wheel in place.
O firmly to lock the
LPD2154
1. To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor
O
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side .
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as needed .
CAUTION
• Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.
• Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.
LPD3093
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open.
LPD3290
Driver’s and passenger’s side
CARD HOLDER
To use the card holder, slide card into the clip. Do not view information while operating the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
MIRRORS
WPD0126
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)
Use the night position
O to reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position daylight hours.
when driving in
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
LPD2418
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
O or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.
LPD2452
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
Move the small switch O to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch
O
Move the switch to the center (neutral) po-
.
sition to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.
WARNING
• Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.
• Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
LPD2112
Manual folding outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defog, defrost or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the VOL (volume) knob /
PUSH (power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-13
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Intelligent Around View® Monitor
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-30
MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
iPod®* player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . 4-63
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Bluetooth® connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Phone display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Receiving/Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S
MANUAL
LHA5548
Refer to the digital NissanConnect® Owner’s manual using the QR code on this page, or your printed NissanConnect®
Owner’s manual (if so equipped). This manual includes the following information:
• NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped)
• Audio system
• Apple CarPlay®
• Android Auto
TM
• Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
• Viewing information
• Other settings
• Voice recognition
• General system information
WARNING
• Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.
• Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.
• Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
• In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS
* For additional information regarding the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control button, see “Bluetooth® Hands-
When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not running for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen.
1. Display screen
2. TUNE·SCROLL knob / PUSH SOUND button
3.
BACK button
4. DISP button
LHA4960
5.
6.
button*
MENU button
7.
(brightness control) button
8. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH button
(power)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
• The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury.
• To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.
• Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display.
Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
WARNING
• ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.
• Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
Touch-screen operation
LHA5318
Selecting the item
Menu Item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters
123
OK
Result
Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ return to the previous screen.
” key to
Touch the “+” key or the “−” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
Touch to manually enter numbers.
Completes the character input.
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
HOW TO USE THE
BUTTON
MENU
To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
LHA5319
3. Touch the desired item.
LHA5318
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Settings
Connections
Menu item
Phone
Sound
Volume & Beeps
Clock
On-screen Clock
Clock Format
Daylight Savings Time
Set Clock Manually
System Voice
Camera
Others
Display
Language
OSS Licenses
Return All Settings to Default
Result
Touch to change the following settings.
Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional
information, see “USB connections screen” (P. 4-55) and “Bluetooth® connections screen” (P. 4-81).
For additional information, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” (P. 4-67).
For additional information, see “Audio system” (P. 4-45).
For additional information, see “Volume & beeps” (P. 4-84).
Touch this key to adjust clock settings.
Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Touch to set the clock to 12 hour or 24 hour formats.
Touch to adjusts the daylight saving time to on or off.
Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes.
For additional information, see “Settings” (P. 4-75).
Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.
Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, see “Adjusting the
Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
(brightness control) BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press the button. Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display.
Press and hold the button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press and hold the button again to turn the display on.
HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume)
KNOB / PUSH (power)
BUTTON
Press the PUSH (power) button to turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL
(volume) knob to adjust audio volume.
LHA5380
SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH
BAR
Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the Launch Bar
O which is displayed on most of the main menu screens (the Launch Bar does not appear on some screens such as settings screens, camera screens, etc.)
Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to display the corresponding menu screens.
The following menu items are available on the Launch Bar:
• Phone
• AM
• FM
• USB/iPod
• Bluetooth
• AUX
• Settings
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)
1. CAMERA or DISP button
WARNING
• Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Rear-
View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
• RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5320
• The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
• The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.
LHA5321
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just above the vehicle’s license plate .
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.
LHA4805
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line played on the monitor.
are dis-
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
• Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
• Yellow line
• Green line
O
O
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
Vehicle width guide lines
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
Predicted course lines (if so equipped)
Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
LHA5322
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5323
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA4995
Backing up near a projecting object
The predicted course lines
O
(if so equipped) do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.
LHA5324
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position position
O is shown farther than the in the display. However, the position O is actually at the same distance as the position . The vehicle may hit the
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
object when backing up to the position O if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES (if so equipped)
WARNING
• If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.
• When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
LHA5043
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen
O when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4770
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines
.
enter the parking space
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines to the parking space
O parallel while referring to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, touch the “Settings” key.
2. Touch the “Camera” key.
LHA5047
3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,
“Color”, or “Black Level” key.
4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” key on the touch-screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF
PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so equipped)
To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Touch the “Settings” key.
2. Touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key to turn the feature ON or OFF.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
• Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
• Objects viewed in the RearView
Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
• Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
• Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
• Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up.
• Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
• When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
• Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
• When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.
• When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
• Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
• The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
• Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.
• There may be a delay when switching between views.
• If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5321
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera O , the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®
MONITOR (if so equipped)
1. CAMERA button
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5320
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View® Monitor system could result in serious injury or death
• The Intelligent Around View® Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
• The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The Intelligent Around View® Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
• Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of the front of the vehicle.
• Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of the rear of the vehicle.
• Bird's-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle from above.
• Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front passenger's side wheel.
• Full Screen Rear View
The view to the rear of the vehicle (which is a little wider than the standard Rear
View).
LHA5325
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one just above the vehicle’s license plate .
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®
MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate the Intelligent Around View® Monitor.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
The screen displayed on the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pressed with the shift lever in a position other than the R
(Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
• The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
• Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-eye view as a reference. The lines and the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.
• If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird's-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
• When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.
• Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.
• Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line.
• The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
• The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.
SAA1840
Front view
Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with reference to the vehicle body line displayed on the monitor.
are
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
• Red line
O
• Yellow line
: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
O
: approximately 3 ft (1 m)
• Green line : approximately 7 ft (2 m)
• Green line O so equipped)
: approximately 10 ft (3 m) (if
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4992
Rear view
Vehicle width guide lines :
Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up.
Predicted course lines :
Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the straightahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines
O are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.
LHA4264
Bird’s-eye view
The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.
The vehicle icon O shows the position of the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover are indicated in black.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
After the ignition switched is placed in the
ON position, the non-viewable area O is highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the birds-eye view is displayed.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are displayed in red and will blink for the first 3 seconds to remind the driver to be cautious.
WARNING
• Objects in the bird's-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.
• Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.
• Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
• The view of the bird's-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters.
• A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.
LHA2652
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line part of the vehicle.
shows the front
The side-of-vehicle line O shows the approximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
The extensions side
O of both the front O and lines are shown with a green dotted line.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
LHA5322
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
LHA5323
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA4995
Backing up near a projecting object
The predicted course lines
O do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
LHA5324
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position position
O is shown farther than the in the display. However, the position O is actually at the same distance as the position . The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position O if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
• If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.
• When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5043
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen
O when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.
LHA4770
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines
.
enter the parking space
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines to the parking space
O parallel while referring to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View® Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View® Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are:
• Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
• Rear view/front-side view split screen
• Full screen rear view
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) position, the available views are:
• Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
• Front view/front-side view split screen
The display will switch from the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor screen when:
• The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
• A different screen is selected.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View® Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
LHA5047
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, touch the “Settings” key.
2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Display Settings” key.
4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,
“Color”, or “Black Level” key.
5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” key on the touch-screen display.
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5326
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®
MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for Intelligent Around View® Monitor.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• Do not use the Intelligent Around
View® Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the trunk is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the
Intelligent Around View® Monitor.
• The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor differs from the actual distance.
• The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything such as a license plate frame on the vehicle that covers or blocks the view of the cameras.
• When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
• Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments.
Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be viewed O . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam
O of the camera viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
• There may be a delay when switching between views.
• When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.
• When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
• The colors of objects on the Intelligent
Around View® Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
• Objects on the Intelligent Around View®
Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment.
• There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird'seye view.
• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
LHA3591
System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LHA3592
When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected if it occurs frequently. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LHA5325
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras
O
, the Intelligent Around
View® Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)
1. CAMERA button
LHA5320
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving
Object Detection (MOD) system could result in serious injury or death
• The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle.
When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
• The system is deactivated at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
• The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:
• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
• When the CAMERA button is pressed to activate the camera view on the display.
• When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed.
LHA4190
Front and bird’s-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:
• When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5171
Rear and bird’s-eye views
• When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view.
• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not operate if the trunk is open.
LHA4997
Rear and front-side views
The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard when in front or rear view and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.
NOTE:
Full screen rear view
LHA4998
While the RCTA chime is beeping, the
MOD system does not chime.
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame
O is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame
O is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes.
A blue MOD icon
O is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A gray
MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is not operative.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon is not displayed.
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so equipped)
Some vehicles include the option to allow the MOD system to be turned on or off.
To turn the MOD system on or off:
1. Touch the “Setting” key.
2. Touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Moving Object Detection” key to switch between ON or OFF.
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
• Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
• The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:
– When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects.
– When there is a blinking source of light.
– When strong light such as another vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is present.
– When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.
• The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
• The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
• If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.
• When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
The blue MOD icon will change to orange if one of the following has occurred:
• When the system is malfunctioning.
• When the component temperature reaches a high level (icon will blink).
• When the RearView camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LHA5325
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras O , the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
VENTS
Side vents
LHA5328
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
LHA5329
Center vents
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides or vent knobs.
For side vents: Move the slide toward to close the vent and away from open it.
to
For center vents: Rotate the knob clockwise to close the vent and counterclockwise to open it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fan speed control dial
Heated seat switches (if so equipped)
Front defroster button
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
5.
6.
7.
8.
LHA4783
Air recirculation button
MAX A/C / temperature control dial
Air flow control buttons
A/C (air conditioner) button
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
• The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
• Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
• When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
CONTROLS
Fan speed control dial
The fan speed control dial turns the fan on and off and controls fan speed.
Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets.
— Air flows from center and side vents.
— Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Turn the dial to the MAX A/C position for maximum cooling. Air will flow from center and side vents.
MAX A/C is an automatic change to recirculate, A/C on and vent mode to improve
A/C performance.
Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the when: button to the ON position
• driving on a dusty road.
• to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.
• for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation.
A/C (air conditioner) button
Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position and press the button to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, see “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Heated seat switches (if so equipped)
For additional information, see “Heated
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets and the side vent outlets.
1. Press the button to the off position for normal heating.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents.
1. Press the button to the off position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the defrost/defog button .
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.
• To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan speed control dial to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position.
• When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. The recirculation mode cannot be activated in the position.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets.
1. Press the button to the off position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
1. Press the air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.
• When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position, and press the button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the button to the off position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.
4. Press the A/C button. The indicator light comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
• For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, press the button to the ON position. Be sure to return the to the off position for normal cooling.
MAX A/C may be used for quick cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the button to the off position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.
4. Press the A/C (air conditioner) button.
The indicator light comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
• When the or are selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Operating tips
• Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
• After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
• The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication.
• A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, see
“If your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-11).
• When Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) is activated, the manual climate control system will default to the last used heating or cooling mode.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting.
The air recirculation button should always be in the off position for heating and defrosting.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5330 LHA5331
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
LHA5332
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5333
LHA5334
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
LHA4784
1.
AUTO (automatic) climate control button / temperature control dial (driver’s side)
2.
Display screen
3.
Heated seat switches (if so equipped)
7.
8.
9.
4.
SYNC button / temperature control dial
(passenger’s side)
5.
A/C (air conditioner) button
6.
Air recirculation button
Air flow control button
Fan speed control buttons
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
10.
Rear window and outside mirror
11.
(if so equipped) defroster switch
Front defroster button
12.
ON-OFF button
WARNING
• The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.
NOTE:
• Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
• When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution, air intake control, and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.
• Adjust the temperature display to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
• The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, air intake control and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
• A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver's and front passenger's side temperature using each temperature control dial. To synchronize the driver’s and front passenger’s temperature settings, press the
SYNC button.
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.
• The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
• Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.
• Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Press the front defroster button on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.
• To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed control buttons to set the fan speed to maximum.
• As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.
• When the front defroster button is pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Remote Engine Start with
Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster, heated seats (if so equipped) and heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated automatically.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control buttons
Press the fan speed control buttons to manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. Temperature can be adjusted on the driver’s and passenger’s side.
Air recirculation
Press the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.
When the outside temperature exceeds
70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption.
To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the air recirculation button (indicator light will turn off) to enter fresh air mode.
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually control the intake air, press the air recirculation button. To return to the automatic
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems control mode, press and hold the air recirculation button for about 2 seconds.
The indicator light will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically.
A/C (air conditioner) button
Start the engine, press the fan speed control buttons to the desired position and press the button to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Air flow control
Pressing the button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet:
— Air flows from center and side vents.
— Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.
Synchronize climate settings
Press the SYNC button to synchronize climate settings. The sync indicator will turn on.
Pressing SYNC will synchronize driver's and front passenger's climate settings.
To change climate settings when SYNC is active (the SYNC indicator is on):
• The driver's side temperature control dial will control the driver and front passenger temperatures.
• The fan speed control dial will control the fan speeds.
To exit SYNC:
• To remove the front passenger from
SYNC, turn the passenger's side temperature control dial.
• Pressing SYNC multiple times will reactivate SYNC.
To turn system off
Press the ON-OFF button.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, see “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Heated seat switches (if so equipped)
For additional information, see “Heated
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)
For additional information, see “Heated
steering wheel switch” (P. 2-61).
LHA5352
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensors, located on the top right and top left of the instrument panel, help the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
• When the climate system is in automatic operation and the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow outlet may default to defroster mode for a maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunction.
After the engine coolant temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally.
• When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level mode, or side demist vent outlets for a maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when the previous climate setting was turned off. This is not a malfunction. After the initial warm air is expelled, the intake will return to automatic control, the air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control button.
• Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
• If you feel that the air flow mode you have selected and the outlets the air is coming out do not match, select the mode.
• When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the foot outlets for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations”
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician equipment.
with proper
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
AUDIO SYSTEM
RADIO
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the PUSH button to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition switch should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics,
AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
MP3 or WMA terms
• MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near
“CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t hear.
• WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to
MP3s at the same level of quality.
• Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.
• Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.
• Multisession — Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.
• ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/ song title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
• Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
• Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
• Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system.
• Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly.
• Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use:
• For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
Notes for iPod® use: iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly.
• Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod®.
• Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
• If an iPod® automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
iPod®* player
• Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen. We recommend using English or
Spanish language characters with an iPod®.
• Large video podcast files cause slow responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.
• If the iPod® automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.
• Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly.
• Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod®.
• Be careful not to do the following, or the cable could be damaged and a loss of function may occur:
– Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 mm) radius maximum).
– Twist the cable excessively (more than
180 degrees).
– Pull or drop the cable.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
– Do not force the iPod® cable connector into the device port.
– Close the center console lid on the cable or connectors.
– Store objects with sharp edges in the storage where the cable is stored.
– Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
• Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the cable and/or connectors are wet. It may damage the iPod®.
• If the cable and connectors are exposed to water, allow the cable and/or connectors to dry completely before connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry).
• If the connector is exposed to fluids other than water, evaporative residue may cause a short between the connector pins. In this case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to the iPod® and a loss of function may occur.
• If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, connectors cracked, contamination such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not use the cable. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to replace the cable with a new one.
• When not in use for extended periods of time, store the cable in a clean, dust free environment at room temperature and without direct sun exposure.
• Do not use the cable for any other purposes other than its intended use in the vehicle.
*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Bluetooth® streaming audio
• Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
• It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
• Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices.
Make sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system.
• The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions:
– Receiving a call on the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
– Checking the connection to the hands-free phone.
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
• Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
• While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual.
• This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to
Panasonic.
FM/AM RADIO
1. Display screen
2. PUSH SOUND button / TUNE·SCROLL knob
3.
BACK button
LHA4963
4.
MENU button
5. AUDIO button
6.
/
7. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH button
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
(power)
For additional information, see “Audio op-
eration precautions” (P. 4-46).
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / PUSH
(power) button
Place the ignition switch in the ON position and press the PUSH (power) button while the system is off to call up the mode
(radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the PUSH
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
MENU button
Press the MENU button to show the
Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on the display, then touch the “Sound” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Sound Settings
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sensitive Volume
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching “-”/“+” , “L”/”R”, or “R”/”F” keys.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Audio button
Press to display the audio screen. When this button is pressed while the audio screen is not displayed, the last audio source played will play.
LHA4708
AM/FM radio screen
1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key
Touch to display the radio menu screen.
2. “Direct Tune” (if so equipped)
Touch to manually enter a station.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio source.
4. Reception information display
Reception information currently available such as frequency, station name, etc. is displayed.
5. Preset list
To listen to a preset station, touch the corresponding station from the preset list. If displayed, touch the “ < ” or “ > ” keys to scroll the preset list.
AM radio operation
Press the MENU button and touch the
“AM” key or press the AUDIO button and select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar to bring up the AM display screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
“AM” key is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing.
AM Menu
Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM
Menu screen options:
• SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the “AM
Menu” key on the radio screen and then touch the “SCAN” key. The stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Touching the “SCAN” key again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
• Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to scan and update the station list displayed on the right side of the AM Menu screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
“FM” key is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing.
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
Press the or buttons to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
FM Menu
Up to six stations can be registered in the preset list.
1. Select the AM radio band.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list.
To select and listen to the preset stations, press or on the steering wheel briefly or touch a preferred station on the preset list on the radio screen.
FM radio operation
Touch the “FM” Menu key to display the FM
Menu screen options:
• SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch the “FM Menu” key on the radio screen and then touch the “SCAN” key. The stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting stations for several seconds. Touching the “SCAN” key again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
• Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to update the station list displayed on the right side of the FM Menu screen.
• RDS Info: Radio station and song information can be displayed on the FM display screen.
Press the MENU button and touch the
“FM Menu” key or press the AUDIO button and select FM on the bottom of the Launch
Bar to bring up the FM display screen.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
Press the or buttons to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
1 to 12 Station memory operations
Up to 12 stations can be registered in the preset list.
1. Select the FM radio band.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list.
To select and listen to the preset stations, press or on the steering wheel briefly or touch a preferred station on the preset list on the radio screen.
Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation
Connecting auxiliary devices
Connect an AUX device into the AUX input jack located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls.
The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or phone.
Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono plug is used, the audio output may not function normally.
Activation and playing
Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX cable to the AUX device and the AUX input jack. Select AUX mode from the audio source menu screen or by pressing the
Source button on the steering wheel.
LHA4709
AUX screen
• Audio source indicator
Indicates that the AUX source is currently playing.
• “Volume Setting” keys
Touch one of the keys to select the sound output gain from Low, Medium and High.
• AUX from Launch Bar
Touch to change from another source to
AUX.
Additional features
For additional information, see “iPod®
player operation” (P. 4-57) regarding the
iPod® player available with this system.
For additional information, see “USB (Uni-
versal Serial Bus) Connection Port” (P. 4-54)
regarding the USB connection port available with this system.
For additional information, see “Bluetooth® streaming audio”
about the
Bluetooth® audio interface available with this system.
Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of
Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
LHA4964
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
• Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
• Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
The USB port is located beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle's audio system.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4711
USB connections screen
Press the MENU button and touch the
“Connections” key or press the “Settings” key and touch the “Connections” key to change USB settings.
• Auto Change Source
Touch “ON” or “OFF” to change the audio source settings for USB memory devices or an iPod® connected through a USB cable.
LHA4710
USB screen
1. “USB Menu” key
Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio source.
4. USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions
5. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions.
Keys Description
Each time “ ” key is touched, the repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of the current track.
Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.
Each time “ ” key is touched, the random mode changes.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
USB memory device player operation
Activation and playing
Connecting the USB memory device into the port will start playing the USB memory.
USB memory device can also be played by touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen or by touching USB on the Launch Bar.
To pause playing the USB memory device touch the “ ” key. To resume playing, touch the “ ” key.
Skipping tracks
To skip the tracks, press the or buttons on the control panel or touch the
“ ” or “ ” keys on the screen repeatedly until the preferred track is selected.
NOTE:
Depending on the condition, skipping to the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice.
Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To rewind or fast-forward the track, press and hold the or buttons on the control panel or touch and hold the “ or “ ” keys on the screen.
”
Changing play mode
Repeat mode
Touch the “ ” key on the USB screen to change the repeat mode.
The following modes are available:
All: Repeat all
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder
1 Track: Repeat track
Random mode
“
“
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to change the random mode as follows:
” is not highlighted: Random off
” highlighted: Random on
USB menu
Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB screen to display the USB Menu screen.
“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB screen.
“Folder List” key Touch to display the folder list.
Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or track from the list.
“Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB screen.
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4964
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
• Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the iPod® can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB connection port located beneath the heater and air conditioner controls.
Connect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB connection port on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
• iPhone® 11 Pro Max
• iPhone® 11 Pro
• iPhone® 11
• iPhone® XR
• iPhone® XS Max
• iPhone® XS
• iPhone® X
• iPhone® 8 Plus
• iPhone® 8
• iPhone® 7 Plus
• iPhone® 7
• iPhone® SE
• iPhone® 6s Plus
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
• iPhone® 6s
• iPhone® 6 Plus
• iPhone® 6
• iPhone® 5s
• iPhone® 5c
• iPhone® 5
• iPod touch® (6th generation)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above. The
Lightning™ connector works with iPhone®
(5 through 11) and iPod touch® (6th generation). USB works with iPhone® (5 through 11) and iPod touch® (6th generation).
All Android devices that have Android OS
5.0 or later are supported.
LHA4724
iPod screen
1. “iPod Menu” key
Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio source.
4. Album artwork
An image of the album artwork is displayed when available if the setting is turned on.
5. iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback functions
6. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback functions.
Keys Description
Each time “ ” key is touched, the repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.
Each time “ ” key is touched, the random mode changes.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
iPod® memory device player operation
Activation and playing
Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB cable will activate the iPod® mode.
The iPod® can also be played by touching the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by touching iPod on the Launch Bar.
Skipping tracks
To skip the tracks, press the or buttons on the control panel or touch the “
” or “ ” keys on the screen repeatedly until the preferred track is selected.
NOTE:
Depending on the condition, skipping to the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice.
Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To rewind or fast-forward the track, press and hold the or buttons on the control panel or touch and hold the “ or “ ” keys on the screen,
”
Changing play mode
Repeat mode
Touch the “ ” key on the iPod® screen to change the repeat mode. The following modes are available.
No text displayed: Repeat off
All: Repeat all
One: Repeat track
“
“
Random mode
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to change the random mode as follows.
” is not highlighted: Random off
” highlighted: Random on
iPod® Menu
Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod® screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.
“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB screen.
“Folder List” key (if so equipped)
Touch to display the folder list.
Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or track from the list.
“Album Artwork” key
“Playlists” key
“Artists” key
Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB screen.
Touch to display the list according to the selected item.
“Albums” key
“Songs” key
“Podcasts” key
“Genres” key
“Composers” key
“Audiobooks” key
“iTunes Radio” key
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® device with streaming audio (A2DP profile), you can set up the wireless connection between your Bluetooth® device and your vehicle’s audio system.
This connection allows you to listen to audio from the Bluetooth® device using your vehicle’s speakers.
To use Bluetooth® streaming audio touch the Bluetooth® Icon on the Launch
Bar, then touch the “BT Audio” key.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
Manual Connecting Procedure
1. Select the “Settings” key on the Launch
Bar.
2. Touch the “Connections” key.
3. Touch the Bluetooth tab and touch the
“Add New” key.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
If a PIN appears on the screen, operate the
Bluetooth® device to enter/confirm the
PIN.
NOTE:
LHA4726
A cellular phone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If the device needs to be connected, see “Connecting
Bluetooth
Menu Item
Favorite (Connection first)
PIN
ON
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system, press and hold the button on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the system will announce “transferring to the add phone settings menu”. The system will start the pairing procedure. When a compatible phone is found, a message with a
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the connection process. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen”
LHA4727
Bluetooth® screen
1. “BT Menu” key
Depending on the Bluetooth® version supported by the connected device, either the “BT Menu” key or “Connections” key is displayed.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio source.
4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® audio playback functions
5. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
Bluetooth® operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® playback functions.
Keys Description
Each time “ ” key is touched, the repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of the current track.
Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.
Each time “ ” key is touched, the random mode changes.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
Bluetooth® audio operation
The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward, rewind, randomize and repeat music may be different between devices.
Some or all of these functions may not be supported on each device.
NOTE:
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device that is connected, it may not be possible to perform audio operations or a delay may occur before music is played back.
Activation and playing
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu screen or by touching Bluetooth on the
Launch Bar.
To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio, touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ” key to resume playing.
Changing folders
To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To fast-forward or rewind the track, press and hold the or buttons on the control panel or touch the “ keys on the screen.
” or “ ”
Changing play mode
Repeat mode
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to change the repeat mode.
Random mode
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to change the random mode.
NOTE:
Available repeat/random modes change depending on the connected device.
BT Menu
Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth® audio screen to display the Bluetooth® audio menu screen.
The following items are available.
“Now Playing” key
“Current List” key (if so equipped)*
Touch to display the
Bluetooth® audio screen.
A list of tracks in the currently selected folder is displayed.
“Connections” key
“Folder List” key*
Touch to display the connections screen.
Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder.
*: displayed only when available.
NOTE:
Depending on the connected device, the
“BT Menu” key may not be displayed.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4122
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
1.
Menu control switch/ OK button
2.
3.
(back) switch
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
4. Volume control switch
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume.
Menu control switch/OK button
In the vehicle information display, navigate to ”Customize Display”, “Main menu selection”, then “Audio”. Use the OK button to change the mode in the following sequence:
AM → FM → USB/iPod®* → Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM.
* These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or connected to the system.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
For most audio sources, pushing the tuning switches for more than 1.5 seconds provides a different function than pushing for less than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM:
• Press the or buttons for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station.
• Press the or buttons for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station.
iPod®:
• Press the or buttons for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.
USB:
• Press the or buttons for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.
• Press the or buttons for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the current song.
Bluetooth® Audio:
• Press the or buttons for less than 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the next song.
• Press the or buttons for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the current song.
(back) switch
Push the (back) switch to return to the previous screen or cancel the current selection.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
SIRI® EYES FREE
ANTENNA
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.
CAUTION
• Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
• When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to reduce user distraction. In this mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interaction by voice control. After connecting a compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated from the wheel.
button on the steering
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as displaying pictures or opening apps, may not be available while driving.
• For getting best results, always update your device to the latest software version.
• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
• For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes
Free, please refer to the Apple website.
REQUIREMENTS
Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be accessible from the lock screen. Please check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device to the latest software version.
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4965
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Press seconds.
button for more than 1.5
2. Speak your command and then listen to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, press the button again within 5 seconds of the end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the session.
Example 1 – Playing music
1. Press seconds.
button for more than 1.5
2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change to
Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when the music starts playing. Mode selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the track or audio source to resume playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example 2 – Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone® settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming text messages.
2. After reading the message, press or press and hold the button to reply using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or a similar command to reply using Siri
Eyes Free.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
Cannot access Siri Eyes
Free from switch on the steering wheel
Audio Source does not change automatically to iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track, previous track or play timer does not work
Cannot hear any music/ audio being played back from a connected iPhone®
Cannot receive text message notifications on the vehicle audio system
Cannot reply to text message notifications by Siri
Eyes Free
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Press the ing wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
button for more than 1.5 seconds on the steer-
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.
WARNING
• A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
• If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
• If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
• Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
• Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
• Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
• For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM
WARNING
• Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
• If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
LHA4953 make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatically to the system, consult the phone's owner's manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to six different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
• Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the invehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.
• Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized or work properly.
Please visit www.nissanusa.com/ bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
• You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
• When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a call.
• Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
• While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual.
The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.
• Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
• For additional information, refer to the cellular phone owner's manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing
Regulations.
Equipment
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to
Panasonic.
USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the button is pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce
“There is no phone connected” and will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe the following:
• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Keep all vents pointed away from the microphone and close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises
(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.
• Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.
• Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds.
• Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
• For calling contacts by name, please say both the first and last name of the contact for better recognition.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press the button located on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted.
• If a command is not recognized, the system announces, “Please say or select a command from the displayed list.” Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice.
• If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response.
• You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Exit” and ends the Voice Recognition session. You can also press and hold the button on the steering wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to end the Voice Recognition session. Whenever the Voice Recognition session is canceled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.
• If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume control switches on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the button on the steering wheel. After interrupting the system, wait for a beep before speaking your command.
One Shot Call (if so equipped)
To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, press the the tone say, “Call Redial”.
button and after
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4723
INDICATORS
When a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, indicators O for the phone and text messaging are displayed on the top of the screen.
Indicator Description
Indicates there are unread received messages.
Indicates the
Bluetooth® device that is currently connected.
Indicates the strength of the signal the
Bluetooth® device is receiving.
Indicates the amount of remaining
Bluetooth® device battery.
LHA4954
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel.
VOICE COMMAND BUTTON
Press and hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds to initiate the Voice Recognition session.
To exit the Voice Recognition session press and hold the for more than 1.5 seconds. For additional information, see “Voice
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
You can use the button to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once.
If an iPhone® is connected, Siri® can be accessed by pressing the button for less than 1.5 seconds. For additional information,
see “Siri® Eyes Free” (P. 4-64).
PHONE BUTTON
To answer an incoming call or to end a call press the button.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
Bluetooth® Connecting Procedure
1. Select the “Settings” key on the Launch
Bar.
2. Touch the “Connections” key.
3. Touch the Bluetooth tab and touch the
“Add New” key.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
If a PIN appears on the screen, operate the
Bluetooth® device to enter/confirm the
PIN.
Bluetooth
To reject a call press and hold the button.
Menu Item
Favorite (Connection first)
PIN
ON
LHA4726
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTING
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
Some cellular phones may require you to accept certain permissions in order to enable features on your Bluetooth® system. During the Bluetooth® pairing process, please check your cellular phone’s display for a pop-up with the request to grant phonebook access.
Granting phonebook access permission will allow your contacts to be downloaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® system. A pop-up may display on your cellular phone stating that the Bluetooth® system would like to access your contacts and call history. Please select “Allow” or Yes” to grant this permission.
Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system, press and hold the button on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the system will announce “transferring to the add phone settings menu”. The system will start the pairing procedure. When a compatible phone is found, a message with a
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the connection process. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen”
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Press and hold the button for less than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone command menu. The commands available are:
• Call <name>
• Dial <number>
• Recent Calls
• Read/Send Text (if so equipped)
• Siri® (if so equipped)
• Voice Assistant (if so equipped)
• Phonebook
• Quick Dial
• Redial
• Select Phone
• Add Phone
• Call <name> Mobile
• Call <name> Home
• Call <name> Office
• Call <name> Main
• Call <name> Other
• Settings
“Call <name>”
Speak this command to make a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook.
Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name to initiate a call. If the system does not recognize the name it will display a list of similar names. After the prompt, speak or touch an item number from the displayed list to place the call.
“Dial <number>”
Speak this command to make a call with a spoken phone number. After the prompt, say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone number. The system will repeat the number back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or
“Correction” to re-enter the phone number.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under “Recent Calls”:
• Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last 20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the incoming call will be displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call.
Touch the “Next” key to move through the list of incoming calls.
• Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last 20 outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call was to an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the outgoing call will be displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call.
Touch the “Next” key to move through the list of outgoing calls.
• Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last 20 missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the missed call will be displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call.
Touch the “Next” key to move through the list of missed calls.
“Read Text/Send Text” (if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text messaging functions.
For additional information, see “Text mes-
“Phonebook through voice command”
Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick steps to access entries stored in the phonebook. Commands are organized by the phone number type selected in the cellular device. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.
The following commands are available:
• <Say a Contact Name>
• <Say a Contact Name> Main
• <Say a Contact Name> Home
• <Say a Contact Name> Mobile
• <Say a Contact Name> Office
• <Say a Contact Name> Other
For additional information on manually selecting phonebook entries, see “Making a
“Quick dial”
Speak this command to access the Quick dial menu. After the prompt, speak or select an item number on the displayed list to place the call. For additional information,
see “Making a call” (P. 4-76).
“Redial”
Speak this command to call the last number dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to dial the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Redialing <name/ number>”. The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it is available, otherwise the number being redialed will be displayed.
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
“Select Phone”
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen”
“Add Phone”
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connections screen”
“Settings”
Speak this command to access the System Voice settings menu. The system will exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of the following options on the screen to change the settings.
• Beep Only for Opening Prompt
By touching the “ON” key, the indicator light will illuminate, the system voice will turn off and only a tone will sound when the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System is activated. To turn the system voice back on, touch the “ON” key again, the indicator light will turn off.
• Best Match List
When the system doesn't recognize a phonebook name or dial number, it will provide a list of similar sounding results.
To turn this off, touch the “ON” key, the indicator light will turn off. To turn on, touch the “ON” key again, the indicator light will turn on.
LHA4705
PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN
The Phone screen can be displayed by pressing the panel.
button on the control
The following options are displayed:
• Quick Dial
Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi-
tional information, see “Quick dial” (P. 4-74)
• Phonebook
Displays the Phonebook screen. For additional information, see “Making a call”
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
• Call History
Displays the Call History screen. For additional information, see “Making a call”
• Dial Number
Displays the Dial Number screen. For additional information, see “Making a call”
• Text Message
Displays the received message screen.
For additional information, see “Text mes-
• Connections
Displays the Connections screen. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® con-
• Volume
Displays the volume adjustment screen.
For additional information, see “Volume &
MAKING A CALL
1. Press the button on the Launch Bar.
The “Phone” screen will appear on the display.
2. Select one of the options to make a call.
Phonebook
To access the phonebook:
1. Press the button on the steering wheel or touch the “ ” key on the launch bar.
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.
3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed list.
Call History
1. Select a phonebook name or phone number from the recent incoming, outgoing, or missed calls tabs.
2. Touch a phonebook name or phone number listed to initiate the call.
Dial Number
1. Enter the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen.
2. Touch the “OK” key on the screen to initiate the call.
For additional options to make a call, see
RECEIVING/ENDING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System, the call information is displayed on the control panel display.
To accept the incoming call, either:
• Press the wheel, or button on the steering
• Touch the “ screen.
Answer” key on the
To end or reject an incoming call, either:
• Press and hold the steering wheel, or
• Touch the “ screen.
button on the
Decline” key on the
If the user is not able to answer the call right away, touch the “Hold Call” key displayed on the screen. A message will be played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a call right now.” The user may then accept the call when available or reject the call.
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
DURING A CALL
While a call is active the following options will appear on the control panel display:
• Mute
Touch this key to mute or unmute the system.
• Dial Number
Touch this key to dial digits during the phone call.
• Switch to Handset
Touch the “Use Handset” key on the screen to transfer the call to the handset
(cellular phone). To transfer the call back from the handset to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, press the button on the control panel then select the “Transfer Hands-free” key on the screen.
NOTE:
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.
• Switch Call
This option will only be available when a second call is active.
If supported by the phone, the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting functionality. If a call is received while another call is already active, a message will be displayed on the screen. Press the button on the steering wheel or touch the “
Answer” key on screen to accept the incoming call. Touch the “ Decline” key on the screen to reject the second call.
While a call is active, press the button on the steering wheel to access additional options.
Speak one of the following commands:
• “Send Digits”
Speak this command followed by the digits to enter digits during the phone call.
• “Switch call”
Speak this command to hold the second call and switch back to the original call.
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
• Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before using this feature.
• Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local regulations for any requirements.
• Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
• If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the connected device does not support the Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone’s owner’s manual for details and instructions.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth® menu for text messages to appear on the headunit. For additional information, refer to your phone’s owner’s manual. Text message integration requires that the phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some phones may not support all text messaging features. Please refer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information, as well as your device’s owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.
The availability of the text message function may vary depending on the cellular phone.
When the cellular phone connected to the vehicle receives a text message, a notification will appear on the control panel display. To check the message, touch the
“Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save the message to be checked later.
Access text messaging through the vehicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or through the vehicles control panel.
Text messaging using Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped)
Sending a text message (if so equipped)
1. Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.
2. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
3. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the following:
• Phonebook
• Quick Dial
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• Dial
4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are available. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following after the tone:
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
• “Driving, can't text”
• “Call me”
• “On my way”
• “Running late”
• “Okay”
• “Yes”
• “No”
• “Where are you?”
• “When?”
Reading a received text message
1. Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.
2. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The display will show a list of 20 messages with the sender and delivery time. Touch the “Next” key on the screen to view all messages. To view a text message press the button on the steering wheel and speak the number item list on the screen.
The following options will be available:
• Play
Speak this command to have the system say the message.
• Reply
Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message.
• Call
Speak this command to call the sender.
• Previous
Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).
• Next
Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it can also be used to create custom messages that are sent through the phone. For additional information, see “Siri® Eyes Free”
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can only be sent through Siri.
Text messaging using the control panel
Display received message list
1. Press the panel.
button on the control
2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the screen
3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply to the message.
Up to 100 messages can be stored in the message list.
Received message screen
Touching the “Read” key on the incoming message notification screen or selecting a message from the message list will show the details of the received message on the display.
Available actions:
• Prev.
Touch this key to read the previous message.
• Next
Touch this key to read the next message.
• Play/Stop
Touch the “Play” key to have the handsfree phone system read out the received message. Touch the “Stop” key to stop reading.
• Call
If the sender of the message is registered in the phonebook, touch the “Call” key to make a call to the sender.
• Reply
A reply message can be selected from the predefined list.
Sending a text message (if so equipped)
This function may not be supported depending on the cellular phone.
1. Press the panel.
button on the control
2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the screen.
3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
The following items are available:
To
Available item
Enter Number by Keypad
Quick Dial
Phonebook
Call History
Select Text
Send
Action
Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm.
Select a recipient from the quick dial list.
Select a recipient from the phonebook.
Select a recipient/phone number from call history.
Touch to display a list of predefined text messages.
Touch to send the message.
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS
SCREEN
LHA4716
1.
“ ” (back) key
2.
Bluetooth tab
3.
Connections screen
4.
“Add New” key
5.
“ ” (settings) key
6.
“
7.
“
8.
“
” (info) key
” (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key
” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System connection) key
“
Access the Connections screen to change settings and view Bluetooth® information.
To access the Connections screen press the MENU button on the control panel.
Touch the “Connections” key on the screen then select the Bluetooth tab.
The paired phone will be added to the list on the Bluetooth® connections screen.
Touching the name of another device on the list will switch the connected device.
” (back) key
“
Bluetooth tab
This tab will display up to six Bluetooth® devices. If six devices are already connected, one of the devices must be deleted before another device can be connected.
“Add New” key
Touch the key on the screen to connect a new Bluetooth® device. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® connecting
” (Bluetooth® settings) key
Touch the “ previous screen.
” key to go back to the
Connecting Bluetooth®
For additional information on connecting a cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, see
“Bluetooth® connecting procedure” (P. 4-72).
NOTE:
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to display a list of options.
• Bluetooth
Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth® connection on or off
• Favorite (Connection first)
Touch this key to change which device will be connected first when multiple devices are connected to the vehicle.
Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the device a favorite connection.
Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the device a favorite connection.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
“
• Pin
Touch this key to customize the PIN code.
Input a four digit number then touch the
“OK” key. The new PIN will be set.
” (info) key
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to display the information of the cellular phone or to delete the device.
Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired device then select “Yes” when a message appears.
“ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System connection) key
A list of connected devices will be displayed on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to the name to connect a device to the
Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Touch the key again to disconnect the device. The device will not be removed from the list. For additional information on removing a device, see “
(info) key”
“ ” (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key
A list of connected devices will be displayed on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to the name to connect a device to
Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the icon.
Touch the key again to disconnect the device. The device will not be removed from the list. For additional information on removing a device, see “ (info) key”
LHA4721
PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE
SETTINGS
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System settings can be changed according to the user’s preference. To access the “Phone” settings menu press the MENU button on the control panel. Touch the “Settings” key then select the “Phone” key.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The following options are available:
Quick Dial
Phonebook
Text Message
Notifications
Automatic Hold
Menu Item
Edit
Delete All
Result
Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, see “Quick dial” (P. 4-74).
Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial.
Download Entire Phonebook
Auto Downloaded
Text Message
All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.
Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected.
Turns the text messaging function on/off.
Text Message Ringtone
Signature
Turn the incoming message sound on/off.
Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.
Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off.
Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages.
Driver Only
Vehicle Ringtone
When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset.
Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.
When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
iPod®/iPhone®
VOLUME & BEEPS
There are several methods to customize the volume settings.
Volume & Beeps
The Volume & Beeps screen can be found by pressing the MENU button on the control panel, touching the “Settings” key on the screen and selecting “Volume &
Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the following options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on the screen.
The available settings are:
• Ringtone
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
• Outgoing Call
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.
• Voice Prompt Vol.
Adjust the volume level of the system voice.
• Text-to-speech Vol.
Adjust the volume of the replay voice for text messaging.
• Button Beeps
Turns on/off the button beep sounds and alarm for prohibited operations.
Volume Settings
The Volume settings screen can be found by pressing the button on the control panel then touching the “Volume” key on the screen. To adjust the volume of the following options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on the screen.
The available settings are:
• Ringtone
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
• Outgoing Call
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.
“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and
“Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance.
iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of
Apple Inc.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-12
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-16
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-21
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Hand type (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Pedal type (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Shift lever indicator (2.0L 4 cylinder
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Eco Drive Report (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) . . . 5-26
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Turning the Traffic Sign Recognition
(TSR) system on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-32
LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-39
BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-61
How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . 5-63
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-88
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Turning the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . 5-103
I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
How to enable/disable the Intelligent
Driver Alertness (I-DA) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-129
Rise-up and build-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Chassis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Intelligent Trace Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Active Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Intelligent Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-140
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
• Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
5-4 Starting and driving
• If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
• Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.
• Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.
• Keep the rear vent windows, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the air recirculation button to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.
• If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.
• The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
• The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
• Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
• Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
• Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
• Do not race the engine while warming it up.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check all your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Starting and driving 5-5
Additional information:
• When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
• The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
• The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure of all your tires is adjusted. After the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
• The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning message is displayed in the odometer when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning message turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off. The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
• The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning is not displayed if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
• Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving.
Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
• The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the driver's door opening.
For additional information, see “Tire Pres-
sure Low - Add Air ” (P. 2-29) or (P. 2-44), “Low
tire pressure warning light” (P. 2-13) or “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 6-3).
WARNING
• Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
5-6 Starting and driving
• If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. For additional information on changing a flat tire,
• When using a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
• Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
• If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
• If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:
• If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.
• If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.
• If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.
Starting and driving 5-7
FCC ID: PAXPMVG000
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position (if so equipped).
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
• If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.
• If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.
• The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill
Tire Alert under the following conditions:
– If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.
– The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire’s pressure sensor is not registered to the system.
5-8 Starting and driving
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
• If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
• If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.
Starting and driving 5-9
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, see
“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-28). If a tire rapidly
loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide.
The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
If there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure, the vehicle will generally move or pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this situation, losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury.
To help avoid loss of control:
• Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
• Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal.
• Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional infor-
mation, see “Changing a flat tire” (P. 6-3 ).
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement.
Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others.
Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
5-10 Starting and driving
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
LSD2645
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.
When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will illuminate as follows:
Push center:
• Once to change to the ON position.
• Two times to change to the OFF position.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be placed in the OFF position until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
Starting and driving 5-11
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed in the meter. For additional information, see “Warning lights, indi-
cator lights and audible reminders” (P. 2-9).
LSD2089
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start function is inside of the vehicle .
• The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.
• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel or inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent
Key may not function.
• If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ON position while carrying the Intelligent Key.
5-12 Starting and driving
The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
ON (Normal operating position)
The ignition system and the electrical accessory power activate at this position without the engine turned on.
The ON position has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions:
• All doors are closed.
• The shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of the following conditions occurs:
• Any door is opened.
• The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.
• The ignition switch changes position.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the AUTO ACC or ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
AUTO ACC:
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the
Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition switch placed from the ON to the OFF position, the radio can still be used for a period of time, or until the driver’s door is opened.
After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System may be restarted by pressing the “POWER button/VOLUME control knob” or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, see the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
• Rapidly push the ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
• Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.
SSD0860
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
Starting and driving 5-13
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent
Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
• If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, see “Battery replacement”
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
• Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.
• Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so equipped), and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
• Check that all windows and lights are clean.
• Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.
• Lock all doors.
• Position seat and adjust head restraints/headrests.
• Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
• Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
• Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information, see “Warning lights, indicator lights and
5-14 Starting and driving
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2.
Continuously Variable Transmission model:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.
Manual Transmission (M/T) model:
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor.
The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.
• If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
• If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to the LOCK position. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4.
Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, with the Intelligent
Key inside the vehicle, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position or to N (Neutral) and apply the parking brake (M/T) and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
Starting and driving 5-15
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so equipped)
WARNING
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)
(if so equipped). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
• Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
• Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.
CAUTION
• Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
• To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.
5-16 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
WARNING
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)
(if so equipped). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
• Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
• Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.
CAUTION
• Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
• To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before moving the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
The Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P
(Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or AUTO ACC position.
Starting and driving 5-17
LSD3738
To move the shift lever:
Press the button O while depressing the brake pedal
Press the button to shift
Shift without pressing the button
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from P
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
AUTO ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any drive position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the
LOCK position. If this occurs, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) to park the vehicle and place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed in to move the shift lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then place the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
5-18 Starting and driving
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position.
The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed in to move the shift lever from P
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
L (Low) (if so equipped)
Use this position for maximum engine braking on steep downhill gradients/ climbing steep slopes and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not use the L
(Low) position in any other circumstances.
LSD3739
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the
P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pressed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged. For additional infor-
mation, see “Jump starting” (P. 6-9). It is rec-
ommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.
To move the shift lever, complete the following procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover.
• If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used.
4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.
6. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have the transmission checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-19
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
LSD2647
Drive sport mode switch
To select the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position.
The drive sport mode indicator in the vehicle information display illuminates next to the Transmission Shift Position indicator.
To turn off the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch again. The drive sport mode indicator will turn off. When the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the drive sport mode will be automatically turned off.
OFF position:
For normal driving and fuel economy, use the OFF position.
ON position:
For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking is necessary, or for powerful acceleration, use the ON position. The transmission will automatically select a different gear ratio, allowing the engine to provide high output.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the drive sport mode in the ON position. This reduces fuel economy.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
5-20 Starting and driving
High fluid temperature protection mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, see “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” (P. 2-11). This will occur even if all
electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch back to the
ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
WARNING
• Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
• Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.
• Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to loss of engine braking.
CAUTION
• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage.
• Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage.
• Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse).
• When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.
• Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to loss of engine braking.
Starting and driving 5-21
SSD0552
Shifting
To change gears or when upshifting or downshifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,
3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed.
5-22 Starting and driving
To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring O and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely.
The shift lever ring
O returns to its original position when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).
Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear.
These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits.
2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine models)
(6 M/T)
GEAR Change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th mph (km/h)
9 (14)
14 (22)
19 (31)
26 (42)
30 (48)
Suggested maximum speed in each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine models)
(6 M/T)
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th mph (km/h)
30 (48)
52 (83)
76 (122)
103 (166)
—
—
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
• Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
• Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
• Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
LSD2197
HAND TYPE (if so equipped)
To engage: Pull the lever up .
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2.
Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
Continuously Variable Transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, press the button and lower completely .
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.
Starting and driving 5-23
ECO MODE SWITCH
LSD0158
PEDAL TYPE (if so equipped)
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.
LSD3737
The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel economy by controlling the throttle sensitivity and transmission points.
To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO mode switch. The ECO mode indicator light
(on the meter or vehicle information display) will remain lit while the mode is active.
To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode switch again. The ECO mode indicator light (on the meter or vehicle information display) will turn off.
The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO mode switch is pushed off. Release the accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode.
The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a malfunction occurs in the system.
Turn off the ECO mode or depress the accelerator pedal fully when:
• Driving with a heavy load of passengers or cargo in the vehicle
• Driving on a steep uphill slope
• ECO mode may affect air conditioner performance
NOTE:
Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily improve fuel economy as many driving factors effectiveness.
influence its
5-24 Starting and driving
LSD2143
SHIFT LEVER INDICATOR (2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION MODELS
ONLY) (if so equipped)
The shift lever indicator is used to support the suitable timing of gear change. It operates only when the ECO mode is on.
The shift indicator icon and recommended gear position are displayed.
The shift indicator icon indicates when to upshift or downshift for fuel economy.
NOTE:
• The shift indicator is a guide for fuel economy. Always pay attention to road conditions and other traffic.
• Downshift the indicator icon to the 1
(1st) position if not displayed.
• If the downshifting icon is displayed when decreasing your vehicle speed, it indicates that the engine speed is low compared to the gear position.
LSD4659
ECO DRIVE REPORT (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the ECO management display appears.
䊊
䊊
Previous 5 times (History)
Current fuel economy
Best fuel economy
The result of ECO evaluation is displayed 30 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the vehicle is driven at least 1/3 miles (500 meters).
Starting and driving 5-25
The average fuel economy for the previous 5 times will be displayed.
The average fuel economy since the last reset will be displayed.
The best fuel economy of the past history will be displayed.
The ECO Drive Report can be set to be ON or OFF.
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) (if so equipped)
LSD3893
The TSR system provides the driver with information about the most recently detected speed limit. The system captures the road sign information with the multisensing front camera unit
O located on the windshield in front of the inside rearview mirror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle information display. For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, the speed limit displayed is based on a combination of navigation system data and live camera recognition. TSR information is always displayed at the top of the vehicle information display, and optionally in the main central area of the display screen.
WARNING
The TSR system is only intended to be a support device to help provide the driver with information. It is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and drive safely at all times.
5-26 Starting and driving
LSD3803
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
SYSTEM OPERATION
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system displays the following types of road signs:
䊊
䊊
Speed sign detected (in Canada)
Speed sign detected (in USA)
Speed sign detected (no speed limit detected)
“Do not pass” sign detected
LSD3789
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
CAUTION
• The TSR system is intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out for road signs.
• The TSR system may not function properly under the following conditions:
LSD3378
– When the road sign is not clearly visible, for example, due to damage or weather conditions.
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the multi-sensing camera unit.
– When the headlights are not bright, for example, due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
– When strong light enters the camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
Starting and driving 5-27
– When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
– If there are deviations in relation to the navigation, for example due to changes in the road routing.
– When overtaking buses or trucks with speed stickers.
LSD3978
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
TURNING THE TRAFFIC SIGN
RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM ON
AND OFF
LSD3790
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the TSR system.
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Speed Limit Sign” and press the
OK button to turn the system on or off.
5-28 Starting and driving
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the TSR system may be deactivated automatically. The “Unavailable: High
Camera Temperature” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR system will resume operating automatically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the TSR system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically and the system
“Malfunction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the TSR “Malfunction” message appears, pull off the road at a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the TSR “Malfunction” message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The TSR system uses the same multisensing front camera unit that is used by the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, located in front of the interior rearview mirror. For additional information, see ”System
LSD3893
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
• This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
Starting and driving 5-29
The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately
37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit located above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, see
“LDW system operation” (P. 5-30).
5-30 Starting and driving
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
LSD3291
The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the
LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD3782
Starting and driving 5-31
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
LDW SYSTEM
5-32 Starting and driving
LSD3486
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD3779
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Lane Departure Warning” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
• The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
• Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Starting and driving 5-33
– When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
– When driving on winding or uneven roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
– When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
– When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
– When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
– When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.
• The system may not function properly under the following conditions:
– On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
5-34 Starting and driving
– On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
– On roads where there are sharp curves.
– On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)
– On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
– When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
– When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
– When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
– When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
– When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
– When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display: “Unavailable: High Cabin
Temperature.”
When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically.
The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions:
• When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically and “Not Available System Malfunction” will appear in the vehicle information display. If “Not Available System Malfunction” appears in the vehicle information display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and the ignition switch in the OFF position and restart the engine/motor. If “Not Available
System Malfunction” continues to appear in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD3484
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit O for the LDW system is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the windshield clean.
• Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.
• Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane markers.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving 5-35
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.
• The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
LSD3832
The BSW system uses radar sensors
O installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
5-36 Starting and driving
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
LSD4641
Starting and driving 5-37
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-38 Starting and driving
LSD3804
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The BSW indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicles leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, see “BSW driving situa-
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Blind Spot Warning” (if so equipped) or “Blind Spot (BSW)” (if so equipped) and press the OK button.
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
LSD3742
Starting and driving 5-39
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-40 Starting and driving
LSD3805
NOTE:
• When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.
• When the BSW system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
• The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
• The radar sensors’ detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
• The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
• The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
• Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
LSD2299
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator flashing
Starting and driving 5-41
Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
NOTE:
• The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.
LSD2300
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
• The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.
• If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.
5-42 Starting and driving
LSD2302
Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.
LSD2303
Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
• When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
• The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
• If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.
Starting and driving 5-43
LSD2305
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.
LSD2308
Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
• If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.
5-44 Starting and driving
• The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
LSD3743
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” or the “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink in the vehicle information display.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
Starting and driving 5-45
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-46 Starting and driving
LSD3806
Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) (if so equipped) will appear in the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD3832
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors O for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement (Type
A) (if so equipped)
For USA
FCC : OAYSRR2B
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Starting and driving 5-47
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
Radio frequency statement (Type
B) (if so equipped)
For USA
FCC : OAYSRR2B
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause interference.
2.
This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information: This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death.
• The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
5-48 Starting and driving
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator (if so equipped)
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
LSD4641
Starting and driving 5-49
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-50 Starting and driving
LSD3804
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.
LSD2216 LSD3832
The RCTA system uses radar sensors
O installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors O can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away.
Starting and driving 5-51
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
5-52 Starting and driving
LSD3744
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Rear Cross Traffic Alert” and press the OK button.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) (if so equipped) in the vehicle information display illuminates.
NOTE:
• When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD3781
Starting and driving 5-53
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
LSD3195
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
• The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
– Illustration
O
: When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.
– Illustration O : When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space.
– Illustration
O
: When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration O : When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.
5-54 Starting and driving
– Illustration
O
: When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
• The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
• Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
LSD2043
Illustration 1
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.
Illustration 2
LSD2044
Starting and driving 5-55
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
5-56 Starting and driving
LSD3745
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” or the “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) (if so equipped) will blink in the vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by conditions such as ice, snow, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD3787
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/
RCTA indicator (orange) (if so equipped) will appear in the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-57
LSD3832
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors O for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement (Type
A) (if so equipped)
For USA
FCC : OAYSRR2B
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
5-58 Starting and driving
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
Radio frequency statement (Type
B) (if so equipped)
For USA
FCC : OAYSRR2B
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause interference.
2.
This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information: This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
䊊
䊊
䊊
䊊
RES + switch
CANCEL switch
SET- switch
Cruise control switch
LSD3251
Starting and driving 5-59
• If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The indicator in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2
inch (11 cm) TYPE A” (P. 2-18) or “Vehicle
information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B”
• If the indicator blinks, push the
Cruise control switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• The indicator may blink when the
Cruise control switch is pushed on while pushing the RES +, SET-, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
• When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.
• In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed.
• On winding or hilly roads.
• On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
• In very windy areas.
5-60 Starting and driving
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
Cruise control switch. The indicator in the instrument panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET— switch and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
• To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
• The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods:
• Push the CANCEL switch.
• Tap the brake pedal.
• Push the Cruise control switch off. The indicator in the instrument panel goes out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled if:
• You depress the brake or clutch pedal (for
Manual Transmission models) while pushing the RES+ or SET- switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.
• The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
• You depress the clutch pedal (for Manual
Transmission models), or move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (for Continuously Variable Transmission models).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET— switch.
• Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
• Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET— switch and release it.
• Push and hold the SET— switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.
• Push and release the SET— switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(if so equipped)
ICC switch
LSD3864
Starting and driving 5-61
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death.
• The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
• Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
• Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system.
Read and understand the Owner’s
Manual thoroughly before using the
ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
• In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to
90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes:
• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed
• Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed
Push the ICC switch O to choose the cruise control mode between the vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode and the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be changed to the other cruise control mode. To change the mode, push the ICC switch
O once to turn the system off. Then push the ICC switch O again to turn the system back on and select the desired cruise control mode.
Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see “Conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-79).
5-62 Starting and driving
HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE
CONTROL MODE
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
O
O
.
, quickly push and release the ICC switch
LSD3295
Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
O , push and hold the ICC switch O for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, see “Conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-79).
LSD3826
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
Starting and driving 5-63
If the radar sensor O detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.
5-64 Starting and driving
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE OPERATION
LSD4253
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a
slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.
If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.
The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also disengage when the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.
For additional information, see “Approach
The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
• When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
• When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime.
• When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.
SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.
Starting and driving 5-65
Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.
LSD3515
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE SWITCHES
The system is operated by the ICC switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.
1.
CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.
2.
RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.
3.
DISTANCE switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
• Long
• Middle
• Short
4.
ICC Switch:
Master switch to activate the system.
5.
SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.
5-66 Starting and driving
LSD3493
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode display and indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color:
• ICC system ON indicator (white): Indicates that the ICC is on.
• ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.
• ICC system warning (orange): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.
4. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.
LSD3865
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push and release the ICC switch
O
. The ICC system ON indicator (gray), set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on in a standby state for setting.
Starting and driving 5-67
LSD3866
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET– switch O and release it. The ICC system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator
O will come on.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
LSD3102
When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately 2 seconds:
• When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not detected
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode
• When the parking brake is applied
• When the brakes are operated by the driver
When the SET– switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up:
• When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the
ICC switch again.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Con-
trol (VDC) system” (P. 5-129).
• When VDC is operating
• When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping.)
5-68 Starting and driving
LSD3496
䊊
䊊
System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle ahead
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The
ICC system displays the set speed.
Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.
NOTE:
• The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.
• When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled.
Starting and driving 5-69
LSD3267
When passing another vehicle, the set speed indicator
O will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the
ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.
How to change the set vehicle speed
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods:
• Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
• Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
• Turn the ICC cators will go out.
switch off. The ICC indi-
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET– switch.
• Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada).
• Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h for Canada).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET– switch and release it.
• Push and hold the SET– switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (8 km/h for Canada).
• Push, then quickly release the SET– switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h for Canada).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).
5-70 Starting and driving
LSD3867
How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.
Each time the distance switch O is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again, in that sequence.
LSD2752
1.
Distance Approximate distance at
Long
2.
Middle
3.
Short
60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]
200 (60)
150 (45)
90 (30)
• The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.
• The distance setting will remain at the current setting even if the engine is restarted.
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
• The chime sounds.
• The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
• When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.
• When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
• When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
• The vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.
• The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.
Starting and driving 5-71
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The
ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:
• When the vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
• When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill
5-72 Starting and driving
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position, L (Low) mode.
• When the parking brake system is applied
• When the VDC system is turned off
• When VDC operates
• When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor
• When a wheel slips
• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The ICC system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.
• The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
• As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
• If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system.
The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
• Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.
• The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:
– On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor
– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill roads
– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
– Interference by other radar sources
• Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
• In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the
ICC system where not recommended in this warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:
• Stationary and slow moving vehicles
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
• Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane
The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.
The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:
• When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
• When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
• When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation within the limitations of the system.
When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them.
In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.
The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
Starting and driving 5-73
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.
5-74 Starting and driving
SSD0252
When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.
SSD0253
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.
Starting and driving 5-75
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
5-76 Starting and driving
LSD3752
The following are conditions in which the
ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set:
• When the VDC system is turned off
• When the VDC or ABS operates
• When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
• When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or L (Low) (if so equipped) position
• When the parking brake is applied
• When a wheel slips
• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.
Condition B
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the ICC system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display and the system will operate normally. If the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See
Owner’s Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled.
The chime will sound and the “Forward
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition D
When driving on roads with limited road structures (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the “Forward
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” message.
Action to take
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
Condition E
When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on.
Starting and driving 5-77
LSD3916
Action to take
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-78 Starting and driving
NOTE:
If the ICC system is temporarily unavailable, the conventional cruise control mode may still be used. For additional information, see “Conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-79).
LSD3826
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor for the ICC system on the front of the vehicle.
is located
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
• Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
• In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected.
Starting and driving 5-79
• Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
• Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
• Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:
– When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
– In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
– On winding or hilly roads
– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
– In very windy areas
• Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
LSD3555
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
2. RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
3. ICC switch:
Master switch to activate the system
4. SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally
LSD3106
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators
The display is located in the vehicle information display.
1. Cruise indicator:
This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color.
• Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on
• Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set
5-80 Starting and driving
• Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
LSD3556
Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC switch seconds.
O for longer than about 1.5
When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators
O are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5
seconds, the ICC system display turns off.
The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the ICC switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off.
To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC switch off when not using the ICC system.
Starting and driving 5-81
LSD3557
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET-
O switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
• To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
• The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
5-82 Starting and driving
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6
km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6
km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
System temporarily unavailable
LSD3305
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:
• When the vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) mode
• When the parking brake is applied
• When the VDC operates (including the traction control system)
• When a wheel slips
When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange.
Action to take
If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-83
REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.
• The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures.
Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
• There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations.
• Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle.
LSD3754
The RAB system detects obstacles behind the vehicle using the parking sensors
O located on the rear bumper.
NOTE:
You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB system will continue to operate. For additional information, please see “Rear So-
5-84 Starting and driving
䊊
䊊
䊊
䊊
RAB system warning light
RAB system warning indicator
Center display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
RAB SYSTEM OPERATION
LSD4005
Starting and driving 5-85
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-86 Starting and driving
LSD4006
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the center display (for vehicles with the Intelligent Around View
Monitor system), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
NOTE:
• The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system.
• When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system ON or OFF.
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
3. Select “Rear” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates.
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM
ON/OFF
LSD3979
Starting and driving 5-87
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-88 Starting and driving
LSD3788
NOTE:
The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.
• When the vehicle approaches an obstacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the function may not operate or the start of operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, driving conditions, the traffic environment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary.
• If it is necessary to override RAB operation, strongly press the accelerator pedal.
• Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following objects:
– Moving objects
– Low objects
– Narrow objects
– Wedge-shaped objects
– Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])
– Objects that suddenly appear
– Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc.
• The RAB system may not operate for the following obstacles:
– Obstacles located high off the ground
– Obstacles in a position offset from your vehicle
– Obstacles, such as spongy materials or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave
• The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions:
– There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., attached to the sonar sensors.
– A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle.
– The surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the rear of the vehicle.
• The RAB system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions:
– There is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle.
– There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle.
– There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface.
– The vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain.
– There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.
– An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicle’s sonar, is near the vehicle.
• Once the automatic brake control operates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches the same obstacle.
• The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time.
Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
• In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently:
– The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
– The vehicle is driven on a steep hill.
– The vehicle’s posture is changed
(e.g., when driving over a bump).
– The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
– The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the steering wheel fully.
– Snow chains are used.
– Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used.
– The brakes are cold at low ambient temperatures or immediately after driving has started.
Starting and driving 5-89
– The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle.
• Turn the RAB system off in the following conditions to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation:
– The vehicle is towed.
– The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck.
– The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer.
– The vehicle drives on an uneven road surface.
– Suspension parts other than those designated as Genuine
NISSAN parts are used. (If the vehicle height or the vehicle body inclination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.)
– If the vehicle is using an accessory like a bike rack, or cargo carrier that blocks the sensors.
• Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, the RAB system warning light will illuminate, and the “System fault” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.
LSD3754
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system:
• Always keep the parking sensors clean.
• If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.
5-90 Starting and driving
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
• Do not subject the area around the parking sensors O to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the parking sensors. If the parking sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Do not install any stickers (including transparent stickers) or accessories on the parking sensors O and their surrounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely.
It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane or with a pedestrian ahead in the traveling lane.
LSD3756
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle O to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a camera installed behind the windshield radar sensor.
in addition to the
Starting and driving 5-91
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION
5-92 Starting and driving
LSD4532
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
For the vehicle with 4.2 inch meter display
LSD4533
The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between 6 – 37 mph (10
– 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.
If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system applies harder braking automatically.
While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system is operating properly.
Starting and driving 5-93
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
• When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
• When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead.
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately
2 seconds before the brakes are released.
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
TURNING THE AEB WITH
PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM
ON/OFF
5-94 Starting and driving
LSD3979
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD3788
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
• The I-FCW system is integrated into the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the
I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.
Starting and driving 5-95
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following:
– Pedestrians that are small (for example, children), in a sitting position, operating toys/skateboards, on scooters or in wheelchairs, or not in an upright standing or walking position.
– Animals of any size.
– Obstacles (for example, cargo or debris) on the roadway or roadside.
– Oncoming or crossing vehicles.
– Vehicles where the tires are difficult to see or the shape of the rear of the vehicle is unclear or obstructed.
– Parked vehicles.
5-96 Starting and driving
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.
– If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the system will not function when the vehicle approaches the stationary vehicle at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
– Pedestrian detection will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10km/h).
• For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not issue the first warning.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle or pedestrians ahead in the following conditions:
– In poor visibility conditions (such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand storms, smoke, and road spray from other vehicles).
– If dirt, ice, snow, fog or other material is covering the radar sensor area or camera area of windshield.
– If strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams) enters the front camera or a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, entering a tunnel or driving in lightning).
– In dark or dimly lit conditions, such as at night or in tunnels, including cases where your vehicle’s headlights are off or dim, or the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are off.
– When the direction of the camera is misaligned.
– When driving on a steep downhill slope, on roads with sharp curves, and/or bumpy or dirt roads.
– If there is interference by other radar sources.
– When your vehicle’s position or movement is changed quickly or significantly (for example, lane change, turning vehicle, abrupt steering, sudden acceleration or deceleration).
– When your vehicle or the vehicle or pedestrian ahead moves quickly or significantly such that the system cannot detect and react in time (for example, pedestrian moving quickly toward the vehicle at close range, vehicle cutting in, changing lanes, making a turn, steering abruptly, sudden acceleration or deceleration).
– When the vehicle or pedestrian is offset from the vehicle’s forward path.
– If the speed difference between the two vehicles is small.
– The pedestrian’s profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable; for example, due to transporting luggage, pushing a stroller, wearing bulky or very loose-fitting clothing or accessories, or being in a unique posture (such as raising hands).
– There is poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.
– For approximately 15 seconds after starting the engine.
– If the vehicle ahead has a unique or unusual shape, extremely low or high clearance heights, or unusual cargo loading or is narrow
(for example, a motorcycle).
– When the vehicle or pedestrian is located near a traffic sign, a reflective area (for example, water on road), or is in a shadow.
– When multiple pedestrians are grouped together.
– When the view of the pedestrian is obscured by a vehicle or other object.
• The system performance may be degraded in the following conditions:
– The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
– The vehicle is driven on a slope.
– Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the cargo area of your vehicle.
• The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
• In some road and traffic conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may operate when a pattern, object, shadow or lights are detected that are similar to the outline of vehicles or pedestrians, or if they are the same size and position as a vehicle or motorcycle’s tail lights.
• The system may keep operating when the vehicle ahead is turning right or left.
• The system may operate when your vehicle is approaching and passing a vehicle ahead.
• Depending on the road shape
(curved road, entrance and exit of the curve, winding road, lane regulation, under construction, etc.), the system may operate temporarily for the oncoming vehicle in front of your vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-97
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may react to:
– objects on the roadside (traffic sign, guardrail, pedestrian, motorcycle, vehicle, etc.)
– pedestrians when driving on the narrow alleys, etc.
5-98 Starting and driving
LSD4248
– pedestrians who temporarily protrude into or approaching the driving lane to avoid the obstacles on the road shoulder
– objects above road (low bridge, traffic sign, etc.)
– objects on the road surface (railroad track, grate, steel plate, etc.)
– objects in the e parking garage
(beam, pillar, etc.)
– pedestrians or motorcycles approaching the travelling lane
– vehicles, pedestrians, motorcycles or objects in adjacent lanes or close to the vehicle
– oncoming pedestrians
– objects on the road (such as trees)
• Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
LSD3795
Condition A:
In the following conditions, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically:
• The radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source.
• The camera area of the windshield is misted or frozen.
• Strong light is shining from the front.
• The cabin temperature is over approximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.
• The camera area of the windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving 5-99
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-100 Starting and driving
LSD3796
Condition B:
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids
Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor
Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving
Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor
Blocked: See Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the “Forward Driving Aids
Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor
Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving
Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor
Blocked: See Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C:
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow ice, etc., or is obstructed, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will automatically be canceled.
The chime will sound and the “Forward
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or
“Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition D:
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Manual” message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE:
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.
LSD3890
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
(orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-101
LSD3756
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of the vehicle
O
. The camera is located on the upper side of the windshield
O
.
To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the sensor areas of the front bumper/emblem and windshield clean.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).
• Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any accessory near the sensors. This could block sensor signals and/or cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's detection capability.
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4–B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1.
This device may not cause interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
5-102 Starting and driving
INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION
WARNING (I-FCW)
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1.
L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2.
L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC
établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.
Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or death.
• The I-FCW system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
Starting and driving 5-103
LSD3826
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor
O located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
5-104 Starting and driving
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
LSD4534
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD4535
Starting and driving 5-105
I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.
5-106 Starting and driving
LSD2263
Perform the following steps to turn the
I-FCW system ON or OFF.
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
When the I-FCW system is turned off, the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM
ON/OFF
LSD3979
Starting and driving 5-107
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-108 Starting and driving
LSD3788
NOTE:
• The I-FCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
• The I-FCW system is integrated into the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the
I-FCW system. When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.
Illustration A
I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
LSD2312
Starting and driving 5-109
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The I-FCW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
Illustration B
• The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway
– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles
• (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.
LSD2265
• The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
– Snow or heavy rain
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.
– Interference by other radar sources.
– Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.
– Driving in a tunnel
– (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.
5-110 Starting and driving
– (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.
– (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
• The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-111
5-112 Starting and driving
Illustration C
LSD2266
Illustration D
LSD2313
Starting and driving 5-113
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
5-114 Starting and driving
LSD3795
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
I-FCW system is automatically turned off.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the I-FCW system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD3796
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the “Forward Driving Aids
Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor
Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving
Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor
Blocked: See Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the I-FCW system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily
Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving Aids Temporarily
Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See
Manual” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Starting and driving 5-115
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Manual” warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition D
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner’s Manual” or “Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked: See Manual” message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE:
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.
LSD3890
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.
5-116 Starting and driving
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD3826
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor vehicle.
is located on the front of the
To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
• Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving 5-117
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
(I-DA)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-DA system could result in serious injury or death.
• The I–DA system is only a warning to inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.
• The I–DA system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver’s lack of attention or fatigue in every situation.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to:
– stay alert,
– drive safely,
– keep the vehicle in the traveling lane,
– be in control of the vehicle at all times,
– avoid driving when tired,
– avoid distractions (texting, etc.).
The I–DA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue.
The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.
LSD3807
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
SYSTEM OPERATION
5-118 Starting and driving
LSD3984
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h).
The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip.
The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to the OFF position and back to the ON position.
Starting and driving 5-119
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
(I-DA) SYSTEM
5-120 Starting and driving
LSD3980
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I–DA system.
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD3801
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
(I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I–DA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The I-DA system may not operate properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions:
– Poor road conditions such as an uneven road surface or potholes.
– Strong side wind.
– If you have adopted a sporty driving style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration.
– Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed.
• The I–DA system will not provide an alert in the following conditions:
– Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
– Short lapses of attention.
– Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object.
Starting and driving 5-121
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
LSD3802
System malfunction
If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
• Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
• Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
• Avoid quick starts.
• Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
5-122 Starting and driving
FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.
1.
Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
• Avoid rapid starts and stops
• Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible
• Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible
2.
Maintain Constant Speed
• Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops
• Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops
• Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency
3.
Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
• Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load
• Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag
• Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load
4.
Drive at Economical Speeds and
Distances
• Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag
• Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking
• Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes
• Select a gear range suitable to road conditions
5.
Use Cruise Control
• Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed
• Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains
6.
Plan for the Shortest Route
• Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time
7.
Avoid Idling
• Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions
8.
Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
• Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting
9.
Winter Warm Up
• Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy
• Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving
• Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling
10.
Keeping your Vehicle Cool
• Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible
• When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system
Starting and driving 5-123
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
11.
ECO Mode
• The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel economy by controlling the engine and Continuously Variable Transmission (if so equipped) operation automatically to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Keep your engine tuned up.
• Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
• Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
• Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”
5-124 Starting and driving
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
WARNING
• Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
SSD0488
• Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed in P (Park) for
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission (M/T) models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
• Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.
• Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2.
M/T models
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.
CVT models
Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
Starting and driving 5-125
POWER STEERING
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
• HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB :
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
• HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB :
Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
• HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB :
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
WARNING
• If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
• When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal.
Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the power steering system to overheat.
You may hear a noise when the steering wheel is operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see “Power
steering warning light” (P. 2-15).
5-126 Starting and driving
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
• While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
• If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work.
Braking will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
• The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
Starting and driving 5-127
• Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, see “Tire and
Loading Information label”
– For additional information, see
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.
5-128 Starting and driving
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
• Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non-slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
• Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).
• Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes to note the following:
• The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.
• You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.
• Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.
For additional information, see “Slip indica-
tor light” (P. 2-16) and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” (P. 2-16).
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light comes on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when the indicator light is off.
The vehicle information display is used to turn off the VDC system. The indicator light and the AEB system warning light illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off.
Starting and driving 5-129
When the vehicle information display is used to turn off the VDC system, the system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non-slipping drive wheel. The indicator light flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the indicator light will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
• The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
• Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the or the illuminate.
indicator light may flash indicator light may
• If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may illuminate.
5-130 Starting and driving
• If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the cator light may illuminate.
indi-
• When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.
• When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction.
Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.
• If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.
• The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP
The system gradually adjusts braking power during normal braking to help provide an enhanced brake feel.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn.
WARNING
• The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
• Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the or the illuminate.
indicator light may flash indicator light may
• If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may illuminate.
• If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the cator light may illuminate.
indi-
• When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.
• When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the flash or the illuminate. This is not a malfunction.
Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.
indicator light may indicator light may
• If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the light may illuminate.
indicator
• The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
Starting and driving 5-131
CHASSIS CONTROL
The chassis control is an electric control module that includes the following functions:
• Intelligent Trace Control
• Active Ride Control
• Intelligent Engine Brake
INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL
This system senses driving based on the driver’s steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.
When the VDC system is turned off, the Intelligent Trace Control is also turned off.
If the chassis control warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that Intelligent Trace Control is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. See “Vehicle information display warn-
ings and indicators” (P. 2-26) or (P. 2-41).
WARNING
The Intelligent Trace Control may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.
5-132 Starting and driving
When the Intelligent Trace Control is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the Intelligent Trace Control is operating properly.
You may also feel deceleration when the
Intelligent Trace Control is operating. However, this is not a malfunction.
ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL
This system senses upper body motion
(based on wheel speed information) and controls four wheel brake pressure. This will enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement when passing over undulated road surfaces.
When the VDC system is turned off, the Active Ride Control is also turned off.
When the Active Ride Control is operating, you may hear noise and sense slight deceleration. This is normal and indicates that the Active Ride Control is operating properly.
If the chassis control warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that Active Ride Control is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. See “Vehicle information display
warnings and indicators” (P. 2-26) or (P. 2-41).
INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE
The Intelligent Engine Brake function adds subtle deceleration by controlling gear ratio, depending on the cornering condition calculated from driver’s steering input and plural sensors. This benefit is for easier traceability and less workload of adjusting speed with braking at corners.
The Intelligent Engine Brake also adds subtle deceleration with gear ratio control according to driver’s brake pedal operation.
If the chassis control warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the Intelligent Engine
Brake is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. See “Vehicle information
display warnings and indicators” (P. 2-26) or
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
WARNING
The Intelligent Engine Brake may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.
When the Intelligent Engine Brake is operating, the needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates that the Intelligent
Engine Brake is operating properly.
WARNING
• Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively.
Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
• The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
• The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.
Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
• The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.
• The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level road.
Starting and driving 5-133
REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS)
LSD3247
The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.
When the “DISPLAY” key is on, the sonar view will automatically appear in the touch-screen display. An additional view of the sonar status will appear in the vehicle information display for reference.
WARNING
• The RSS is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.
• The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.
• Read and understand the limitations of the RSS as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indicator and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate different distances to the object.
• Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
• This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
• The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
• The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
CAUTION
• Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.
• Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt.
Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.
5-134 Starting and driving
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible alert of rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
The system is deactivated at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle moves away from the vehicle or if the vehicle moves away from the obstacle.
When the object is detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
LSD3246
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indicator O appears. When the center of the vehicle moves close to an object, the center sonar indicator appears.
LSD2137
The system indicators
O will appear when the vehicle moves closer to an object.
Starting and driving 5-135
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
SONAR SYSTEM
5-136 Starting and driving
LSD3981
The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system:
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display:
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Rear” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
– Select “Auto Show Sonar” to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates.
– Select “Distance” to change the sonar system distance to “Long,” “Medium” or
“Short.”
– Select “Volume” to change the volume to
“High,” “Medium” or “Low”
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
LSD3799
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display:
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display.
Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Rear Sensor” and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
– Select “Display” to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates.
– Select “Distance” to change the sonar system distance to “Long,” “Medium” or
“Short.”
– Select “Volume” to change the volume to
“High,” “Medium” or “Low”
Starting and driving 5-137
SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
• Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
• The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper or on the ground.
• The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
• The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories, or apply anything blocking the sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the system.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
LSD3754
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors O are located on the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the sonar sensors clean.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.
5-138 Starting and driving
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the sonar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole, or use the remote keyless entry key fob or the NISSAN
Intelligent Key®.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information,
see “Engine cooling system” (P. 8-4).
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly.
This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, see
“Changing engine coolant” (P. 8-5).
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,
NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
Starting and driving 5-139
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, see “Tire chains” (P. 8-36).
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:
• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.
• A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.
• A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
• Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
• Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.
• Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.
• Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
• Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.
• Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
• Do not use the cruise control (if so equipped) on slippery roads.
• Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.
WARNING
• Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
• Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.
• Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
Plug the extension cord into a
Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.
5-140 Starting and driving
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.
Starting and driving 5-141
MEMO
5-142 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
(freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
• Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
• Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
• Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
• If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
• Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
6-2 In case of emergency
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add
Air” appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, “Warning lights, indica-
tor lights and audible reminders” (P. 2-9),
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
WARNING
• Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
• If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• When using a wheel without TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately one minute. The light will remain on after one minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for these services.
• Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
In case of emergency 6-3
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the CVT into
P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
• Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is shifted into P (Park).
• Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
This is hazardous.
• Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
LCE2142
A. Blocks
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.
LCE2449
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the trunk and lift the trunk floor carpeting.
2. Jack is located beside of the spare tire.
To remove, take off the rubber strap and lift out.
3. Lift spacer to access the clamp.
6-4 In case of emergency
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.
LCE2450
4. Turn the clamp counterclockwise and remove to release the spare tire.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the sheet metal area around the spare tire. Doing so could result in personal injury.
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)
SCE0630
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod as illustrated.
Apply cloth O between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
In case of emergency 6-5
CE1089
Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire
WARNING
• Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
• Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.
6-6 In case of emergency
• Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
• Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
• Never use blocks on or under the jack.
• Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.
• Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.
Always refer to the illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.
SCE0002
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire.
WCE0056
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated ( O until they are tight.
, , , , )
In case of emergency 6-7
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated
( O , O , O completely.
, , ). Lower the vehicle
WARNING
• Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
• Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.
• Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval.
6-8 In case of emergency
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information Label.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.
LCE2451
6. Install the jack in its storage area and secure with rubber strap.
7. Place the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING
• Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
• The spare tire is designed for emergency use. Refer to specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
• If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
• Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
• Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
• Keep battery out of the reach of children.
• The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
• Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.
• Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
• Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.
In case of emergency 6-9
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
LCE2223
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK or
OFF position.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence illustrated (
O
, , , ).
CAUTION
• Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (−) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
• Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.
6-10 In case of emergency
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
CAUTION
• Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.
• Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models and Manual Transmission (M/T) cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
• For Manual Transmission (M/T) models, never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps.
WARNING
• Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
• To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
• Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (CVT).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped). Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
In case of emergency 6-11
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle.
Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
• Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
• Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
• When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.
• Always attach safety chains before towing.
For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle
(RV), see “Flat towing” (P. 10-20).
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.
6-12 In case of emergency
Two-Wheel Drive models with
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
LCE2345
CAUTION
• Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
• When towing CVT models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).
In case of emergency 6-13
Two-Wheel Drive models with manual transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illustrated.
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
LCE2346
Your vehicle speed should never exceed 60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your vehicle.
After towing 500 miles, start and idle the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles of towing may cause damage to the transmission’s internal parts.
CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
• If you have to tow manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies) or four wheels on the ground:
– Always release the parking brake.
– Move the transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
– Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles (805 km)
When towing long distances or speeds in excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission. For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
6-14 In case of emergency
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:
• Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.
• Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.
• Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.
• Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer's instructions.
• Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
• Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
• Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) System.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
• Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models).
• Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
• Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models).
• Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-15
MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-4
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:
• After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
• After driving on coastal roads.
• When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.
• When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care
CAUTION
• Do not concentrate water spray directly on the sonar sensors (if so equipped) on the bumper as this will result in damage to the sensors. Do not use pressure washers capable of spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or removal of paint or graphics. Avoid using a high-pressure washer closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle.
Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving and do not concentrate the water spray on any one area.
• Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.
• Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.
• Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to assist you in choosing the proper product.
• Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
• Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
WAI0005
GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the inside high-mounted stop light is removed first.
Be careful when removing the highmounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires.
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
䊊
䊊
Push toward rear of vehicle.
Lift to remove.
Appearance and care 7-3
The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:
• Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
• Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
• Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:
• Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.
• Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/ grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
• Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
• Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
7-4 Appearance and care
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
• Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
• Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.
• Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
• Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.
• Never use chloride solutions for cleaning aluminum decoratives (if so equipped), damage may occur.
• Do not spill on or make contact with interior surfaces while handling air fresheners, aroma agents, cosmetics, sunscreen, etc. They may cause permanent discoloration, stain, crack, paint peeling, etc. depending on the ingredients. If they contact the interior surface, wipe them off immediately using a soft cloth.
• Do not use chlorine-based cleaning liquid such as chlorine dioxide and hypochlorous acid, which may cause the paint peeling, corrosion, etc. If it is unavoidable to clean or sterilize interior surfaces, use less than 75% ethanol. Wipe off ethanol completely. If you leave it uncleaned, it may cause paint peeling, discoloration, etc.
Since ethanol is flammable, be careful of fire.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:
• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.
• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer's instructions before using the air fresheners.
Appearance and care 7-5
POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)
The sunshade is made from a tricot material.
CAUTION
To help prevent damaging the moonroof while cleaning:
• Do not rub the material with a cloth.
Doing so can damage the surface of the material or cause a stain to spread.
• Never use benzine, thinner or any similar chemical to clean the sunshade. This may discolor the moonroof and damage the surface.
• Clean water based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.
• Clean oil based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.
LAI2139
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:
• NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards.
• Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.
• Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information, see "Floor mat installation"
• Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
• Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
• After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle.
7-6 Appearance and care
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(manual transmission models) and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift lever in the P (Park) position (Continuously
Variable Transmission models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(manual transmission models) and with the parking brake applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.
LAI2045
Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, see “Seat belt main-
Appearance and care 7-7
CORROSION PROTECTION
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
• The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
• Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.
• Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.
• Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.
• Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.
7-8 Appearance and care
CAUTION
• NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Appearance and care 7-9
MEMO
7-10 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Turn signal bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
• Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move the shift lever to P (Park).
• Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
• If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.
• It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.
before working on your vehicle.
• Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.
• If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.
• Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
• Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.
• Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
• Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.
CAUTION
• Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.
• Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
• Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, see
“Owner's Manual/Service Manual order in-
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage.
If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
8-2 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
LDI3477
2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model)
1.
2.
Engine oil filler cap
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid reservoir
3.
Fuse and relay box
4.
5.
Battery
Air cleaner
6.
Engine oil dipstick
7.
Drive belt location
8.
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
9.
Engine coolant reservoir
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with an engine cover.
Do-it-yourself 8-3
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
• Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down.
Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, see “If your vehicle
• The coolant reservoir is equipped with a pressure type coolant reservoir cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN coolant reservoir cap.
CAUTION
• Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
• When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C).
The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.
8-4 Do-it-yourself
• The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
(or equivalent cooling), including
Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, see the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
LDI3495
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold.
If the coolant level is below the MIN level to the MAX level .
, add coolant
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, see the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, see “Engine
compartment check locations” (P. 8-3).
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.
WARNING
• To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
• Never remove the engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the system.
• Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
• Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.
Do-it-yourself 8-5
ENGINE OIL
LDI3487
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
LDI0371
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks O . This is the normal operating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark
O
, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening.
Do not overfill .
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
CAUTION
• Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
• It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
Make sure to follow the engine oil changing intervals in the maintenance booklet. Operating under the following conditions may require more frequent oil change:
• repeated short distance driving
• driving in dusty conditions
• stop and go commuting.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL
FILTER
For additional information on engine oil and oil filter change, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
8-6 Do-it-yourself
Oil filler cap
Vehicle set-up
LDI3488
Oil drain plug
LDI3507
Oil filter
LDI3508
Do-it-yourself 8-7
LDI3510
Under engine protector
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
• Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points.
• A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.
8-8 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.
LDI3509
Under-engine protector
Removal of under-engine protectors
1. Remove fasteners protector.
and engine
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug and oil filter.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
WARNING
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
• Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
• Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage.
• The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 N·m)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m)
9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil through the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information about drain and refill capacity, see “Recommended fluids/
lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). The
drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine.
10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
After the operation
1. Reinstall under engine protector in reverse order.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
3. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance reminder and oil control system. For additional information, see “Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A”
(P. 2-18) or “Vehicle information display 7
inch (18 cm) Type B” (P. 2-32).
• Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
• Check your local regulations.
Do-it-yourself 8-9
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so equipped)
CAUTION
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
• Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under
NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.
• Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty outlined in your Warranty
Information Booklet.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
For additional brake and clutch fluid specification information, see “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2).
WARNING
• Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch (if so equipped) systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
• Clean the filler cap before removing.
• Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.
LDI3490
BRAKE FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the level is below the MIN line
O
, or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine
NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line O . If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
8-10 Do-it-yourself
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
LDI3531
CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the CL (clutch) MIN line
O
, add
Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent
DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line O . If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI3496
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message (if so equipped) shows on the vehicle information display.
To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the center hole
O of the cap/tube assembly, then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
• Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.
• Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
• Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.
Do-it-yourself 8-11
BATTERY
Caution symbols for battery
No smoking, No exposed flames, No
Sparks
WARNING
Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
Shield eyes
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.
Keep away from children
Battery acid
Note operating instructions
Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.
Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
8-12 Do-it-yourself
• If the battery is labeled “do not open” it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery’s performance.
• Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
• Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
• If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
• Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
• When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
• Keep battery out of the reach of children.
• Do not tip the battery.
LDI3302
NOTE:
Do not try to open the top of the battery.
This battery is not equipped with removable vent caps.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump
starting” (P. 6-9). If the engine does not start
by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Do-it-yourself 8-13
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
LDI3478
CAUTION
• Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.
• Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.
The current sensor O is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.
DRIVE BELT
WDI0638
1.
Automatic tensioner pulley
2.
Generator pulley
3.
Water pump pulley
4.
Air conditioner compressor pulley
5.
Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
8-14 Do-it-yourself
SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition.
SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridiumtipped
O spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
• Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.
Do-it-yourself 8-15
AIR CLEANER
LDI3498
The viscous paper type filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
To remove the air cleaner filter:
1. Unlatch the retaining clips .
2. Pull up at points and remove.
3. Pull up and remove air cleaner housing.
4. Remove the air cleaner filter. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth, then replace air cleaner filter.
8-16 Do-it-yourself
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips.
WARNING
• Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isn't there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.
• Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, see the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.
LDI2757
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Push the release tab
3. Move the wiper blade remove.
.
down and
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
5. Push wiper on to windshield.
CAUTION
• After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.
• Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.
Do-it-yourself 8-17
BRAKES
LDI2731
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
O . This may cause clogging or improper windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin
O
.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The front and rear (if so equipped) disctype brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type brakes (if so equipped) self-adjust every time the parking brake is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed.
For additional information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
8-18 Do-it-yourself
FUSES
LDI3480
Four types of fuses are used. Type
O is used exclusively in the passenger compartment fuse box.
Type O and O are used in the engine compartment fuse box.
Type
O is used in passenger compartment and the engine compartment.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.
LDI3511
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
Do-it-yourself 8-19
If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tabs and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller, which is located in the center of the fuse box cover in the passenger compartment. For additional information, see
“Passenger compartment” (P. 8-21).
LDI2746
5. If the fuse is open
O equivalent good fuse
, replace it with an
O
.
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine
NISSAN parts.
8-20 Do-it-yourself
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver's side of the instrument panel.
LDI3483
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover
O with a suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
O which is located in the center of the fuse
, box cover compartment.
in the passenger
LDI3481
5. If the fuse is open
O equivalent good fuse
, replace it with an
O
.
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.
Do-it-yourself 8-21
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.
8-22 Do-it-yourself
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
LDI2001
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into the slit
O of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.
LDI2637
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.
• Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.
• Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
• Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with and .
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference. (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Do-it-yourself 8-23
LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
LDI3512
Type A (if so equipped)
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb (if so equipped)
CAUTION
• Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance.
Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.
• Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.
• High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
• Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the electrical connector.
3. Rotate the high beam bulb clockwise and remove bulb.
O counter-
4. Rotate the low beam bulb clockwise and remove bulb.
O counter-
Reverse instructions to install bulbs.
8-24 Do-it-yourself
WARNING
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION
• Do not touch glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to bulb.
• Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp.
• Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
Replacing the LED headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
TURN SIGNAL BULB
To replace the turn signal bulb follow the instructions listed in “Replacing the halo-
gen headlight bulb” (P. 8-24).
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Replacing the fog light bulb
If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
• High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
• When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.
• Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart.
• Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)
Low
High/Daytime running (Canada only)
Turn/Park
Side marker*
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
Low
High
Daytime running lights
Turn
Park
Side marker
Headlight assembly (Type C) (if so equipped)*
Low
High
Daytime running lights
Turn/Park
Side marker
Front fog light (If so equipped) *
Door mirror turn signal light (If so equipped)*
Vanity mirror light (If so equipped)*
Map lights*
Room light*
Trunk light*
High-mounted stop light*
Rear combination light*
Tail/Stop/Side marker
Turn
Trunk lid lamp*
Tail
Back up
License plate light*
Item Wattage (W)
55
65
27/7
—
—
—
—
27/7
—
—
21/5
21
5
16
—
* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
—
—
—
5
8
—
—
—
—
8
3.4
—
8-26 Do-it-yourself
Bulb No.
H11
H9
3457NAK
—
—
—
—
3457NAK
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W5W
W8W
W8W
158
—
W21/5W
WY21W
W5W
W16W
—
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
1.
Map light
2.
Room light
LDI3528
3.
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)
4.
Headlight assembly
5.
Fog light (if so equipped)
6.
High-mount stop light
7.
Trunk light
8.
License plate light
9.
Rear combination light
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
Do-it-yourself 8-27
Trunk light
WHEELS AND TIRES
LDI2135
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire”
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and warning is displayed in the odometer, or the “Tire Pressure Low — Add
Air” appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).
For additional information, see “Low
tire pressure warning light” (P. 2-13),
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” (P. 5-5), and “Flat tire” (P. 6-3).
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar.
8-28 Do-it-yourself
Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
• Most tires naturally lose air over time.
• Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, see “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert”
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
•
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
•
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.
•
Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.
•
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Do-it-yourself 8-29
Tire and Loading Information label
䊊
Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.
Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered
8-30 Do-it-yourself
LDI2737
COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's
GVWR.
Tire size - see “Tire labeling”
䊊
䊊
Spare tire size.
Vehicle load limit: see “Vehicle
loading information” (P. 10-16).
LDI0393
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.
Size
Grades: S, SV, SR
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Front Original Tire:
205/60R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
Front Original Tire:
215/45R18
Front Original Tire:
215/50R17
Rear Original Tire:
205/60R16
Rear Original Tire:
215/45R18
Rear Original Tire:
215/50R17
Spare Tire:
T125/70D16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
420 kPa, 60 PSI
Do-it-yourself 8-31
WDI0394
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the
Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.
8-32 Do-it-yourself
WDI0395
Example
95H)
Tire size (example: P215/65R15
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information).
3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.
LDI2786
Example (Type A) (if so equipped)
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire
Identification Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's identification mark.
5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire.
Do-it-yourself 8-33
LDI3639
Example (Type B) (if so equipped)
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XXX
XXXXXX XXXX)
3. Six-digit code: Descriptive code used to identify significant characteristics of the tire.
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left of the Tire Identification Number.
4. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003.
2. Three-digit code: Manufacturer's identification mark.
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.
Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
8-34 Do-it-yourself
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure.
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
• When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.
• Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
• Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.
• Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and differential gears.
• For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
8-36 Do-it-yourself states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed on 215/50R17 and 215/45R18 size tires. Installation of the tire chains/ cables on 215/50R17 and 215/45R18 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/ cables, you should install 205/60R16 size tires on your vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions.
Use only SAE class “S” chains.
Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.
WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, see “Flat tire”
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
•
After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
•
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
•
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
•
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WDI0259
Do-it-yourself 8-37
WARNING
•
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.
•
The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
•
Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.
•
Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
•
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in
“Wheels and tires” (P. 10-10).
WARNING
• The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
• If your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.
8-38 Do-it-yourself
• If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. For additional information on wheel-off set dimensions,
see “Wheels and tires” (P. 10-10).
• When using a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
• The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.
• When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. Contact a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.
• Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.
• Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.
• Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.
• The use of retread tires is not recommended.
• For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.
• For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
• Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
• Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
• Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.
• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
• NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.
Do-it-yourself 8-39
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire)
When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
• The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
• Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.
• Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
• With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
• When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels).
• Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.
• Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
• Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.
• Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
• Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.
8-40 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission Control System Maintenance: . . . . . . 9-6
Chassis and Body Maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Oil control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model) . . . . . . . 9-9
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle’s good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are fully qualified to work on
NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified
Collision Center is located, or go to http://collision.nissanusa.com.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, see “Maintenance precau-
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
WARNING
Failure to follow the procedures listed within this section may result in personal injury.
Additional information on the following items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Check that the gas stays or struts properly and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear hatch fully open. If the hood, trunk, or rear hatch is not held open, have the gas stays or struts replaced.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tire pressure sensor: It is recommended that you replace the tire pressure sensor assembly when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recommended that you have a damaged windshield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a
NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see “Exhaust gas (carbon monox-
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For additional information, see
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, see “Gen-
Items marked with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the se of non-
OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on NISSAN products. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, see “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belt.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For additional information on the proper mixture for your area, see “Engine cooling sys-
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity see
“Recommended fluids/lubricants and ca-
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank type filter)
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the type as originally equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals. If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:
• Replace the manual transaxle gear oil every 20,000 miles or 24 months.
• Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a
CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
• Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
• Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.
• Using a car-top carrier.
If your vehicle is mainly operated under the severe conditions, follow the severe use maintenance intervals shown in the maintenance schedule.
OIL CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with oil control system. It calculates engine oil and filter change intervals based on driving conditions. Driving in the following severe conditions will shorten the engine oil and filter change interval.
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
How driving conditions affect OCS display timing
Conditions
Light
Extreme
Driving Scene
• Freeway driving
• City driving (flat/moderate hills)
• No towing or heavy loads
• No extended engine idling
• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
• Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
• Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-todoor delivery use.
• Using a car-top carrier.
• Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas.
• Sustained high speed driving.
CAUTION
• If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
• Operating your vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine.
• If your oil replacement indicator resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, please change the oil within six months or 5,000 miles (8,000 km) from your last oil change.
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
Display timing
Normal
Early
2.0L 4 CYLINDER (MR20DD engine model)
The following shows the maintenance schedule.
Choose the maintenance schedule needed based on your vehicle driving conditions.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.
5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
10,000 miles/(16,000 km)/
12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace engine oil & filter (1)
• Tire rotation
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Front drive shaft boots
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/
18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspection:
• Intelligent key battery
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
20,000 miles/(32,000 km)/
24 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Fuel tank vapor vent system*
• Fuel lines/connections*
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter (1)
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Front drive shaft boots
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace manual transmission gear oil
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
25,000 miles/(40,000 km)/
30 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/
36 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace engine oil & filter (2)
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace Intelligent key battery
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Front drive shaft boots
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
35,000 miles/(56,000 km)/
42 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
40,000 miles/(64,000 km)/
48 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Fuel tank vapor vent system*
• Fuel lines/connections*
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle & suspension part
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose Inspection
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter (1)
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Front drive shaft boots
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace manual transmission gear oil
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/
54 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace Intelligent key battery
• Tire rotation
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
9-14 Maintenance and schedules
50,000 miles/(80,000 km)/
60 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace engine oil & filter (1)
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Front drive shaft boots
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
55,000 miles/(88,000 km)/
66 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/
72 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Fuel tank vapor vent system*
• Fuel lines/connections*
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle & suspension part
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspection
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter (2)
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace Intelligent key battery
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Front drive shaft boots
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace CVT fluid
• Replace manual transmission gear oil
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
65,000 miles/(104,000 km)/
78 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
70,000 miles/(112,000 km)/
84 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace engine oil & filter (1)
• Tire rotation
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Front drive shaft boots
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/
90 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace Intelligent key battery
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
Maintenance and schedules 9-17
80,000 miles/(128,000 km)/
96 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Fuel tank vapor vent system*
• Fuel lines/connections*
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle & suspension part
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
9-18 Maintenance and schedules
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter (1)
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Front drive shaft boots
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace manual transmission gear oil
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
85,000 miles/(136,000 km)/
102 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/
108 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace engine oil & filter (2)
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace Intelligent key battery
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Front drive shaft boots
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
95,000 miles/(152,000 km)/
114 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
Maintenance and schedules 9-19
100,000 miles/(160,000 km)/
120 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Fuel tank vapor vent system*
• Fuel lines/connections*
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle & suspension part
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
9-20 Maintenance and schedules
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter (1)
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Front drive shaft boots
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace manual transmission gear oil
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/
126 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace Intelligent key battery
• Tire rotation
• Replace spark plugs (1) (2)
• Replace engine coolant * (3)
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
(1) Performed based on the number of miles only
(2) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(3) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
"Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water.
Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.”
* Maintenance items and intervals with “ * ” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
110,000 miles/(176,000 km)/
132 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace engine oil & filter (1)
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Front drive shaft boots
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-21
115,000 miles/(184,000 km)/
138 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belts and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Front drive shaft boots
9-22 Maintenance and schedules
120,000 miles/(192,000 km)/
144 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines & cables
• Brake pads & rotors
• CVT fluid
• Engine drive belts*
• Fuel tank vapor vent system*
• Fuel lines/connections*
• Exhaust system
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle & suspension part
• Front drive shaft boots
• Manual transmission gear oil
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/ hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake, power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, subframe, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials:
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter (2)
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace Intelligent key battery
• Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Front drive shaft boots
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
Essentials:
• Replace CVT fluid
• Replace manual transmission gear oil
• Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(2) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles
(800 km).
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-23
MEMO
9-24 Maintenance and schedules
10 Technical and consumer information
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-13
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Do-it-yourself ” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fuel
Engine oil*1
Fluid Type
Drain and refill
*1 For additional information, see “Engine oil”
Engine coolant with reservoir
With oil filter change
Without oil filter change
With manual transmission
With continuously variable transmission
Capacity (approximate)
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
47 L
4.1 L
3.8 L
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
12-3/8 gal 10 3/8 gal
4-3/8 qt
4 qt
3-5/8 qt
3-3/8 qt
• For additional information, see “Fuel recommenda-
• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SP” (or equivalent) is recommended.
• If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-6 SP motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, see “Engine oil and
oil filter recommendations” (P. 10-7).
6.9 L
7.1 L
1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal
1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) or equivalent.
Manual transmission fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
TL/JR Type 75W-80, or equivalent.
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
TL/JR Type is not available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE
75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement.
However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission
Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as it is available.
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Fluid Type
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
Windshield-washer fluid
USA
Canada
Capacity (approximate)
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
—
—
—
—
—
2.5 L
4.2 L
—
—
—
—
—
5/8 gal
1-1/8 gal
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
—
—
—
—
—
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3.
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT
Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.
• Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
• NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base)
• HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
• For additional information, see “Air conditioner sys-
tem refrigerant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent
• For additional information, see “Air conditioner sys-
tem refrigerant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).
1/2 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate
7/8 gal Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent
Technical and consumer information 10-3
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
CAUTION
• Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if
E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.
• Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
• Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
• Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate
MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and
California laws prohibit the use of
MMT in reformulated gasoline.
• U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.
10-4 Technical and consumer information
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.
• The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
• If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
• E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
• If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).
It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.
10-6 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, see “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
(P. 10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.
LTI2587
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”
Technical and consumer information 10-7
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:
• repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
• driving in dusty conditions
• extensive idling
• stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil may cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. Air conditioner system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to ensure proper and safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Only new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s) shall be used as replacement parts.
A damaged or leaking air conditioning evaporator shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged or leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE
J2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.
10-8 Technical and consumer information
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
Idle speed
M/T
CVT (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model)
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder, inline in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1) cu in (cm
3
) 121.86 (1,997)
1–3–4–2
No adjustment is necessary.
DXE22H11C in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
Technical and consumer information 10-9
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type
Steel
Aluminum
T-type (Steel spare)
Tire size
Spare tire
Size
16 x 6.5JJ
16 x 6.5J
17 x 7J
18 x 7.5J
16 x 4T
205/60R16
215/50R17
215/45R18
T125/70D16
Offset in (mm)
1.57 (40)
1.57 (40)
1.89 (48)
1.69 (43)
1.18 (30)
10-10 Technical and consumer information
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
USA
Canada
Front Track
Rear Track
S, SV
SV
SR
S, SV
SV
SR
S, SV
SV
SR
S, SV
SV
SR
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
M/T, CVT
CVT
M/T, CVT
16 inch wheel
17 inch wheel
18 inch wheel
16 inch wheel
17 inch wheel
18 inch wheel
16 inch wheel
17 inch wheel
18 inch wheel
Unit: in (mm)
182.7 (4,640)
71.5 (1,816)
56.9 (1,447)
56.9 (1,447)
57.0 (1,449)
57.0 (1,448)
57.0 (1,448)
57.1 (1,450)
62.5 (1,588)
61.9 (1,572)
62.3 (1,582)
16 inch wheel
17 inch wheel
18 inch wheel
62.4 (1,585)
61.8 (1,570)
62.2 (1,580)
106.6 (2,708) lbs. (kg) Refer to “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label” on the lbs. (kg) lbs. (kg) center pillar between the driver's side front and rear doors.
Technical and consumer information 10-11
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
(VIN) PLATE
LTI2050
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.
LTI2483
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as shown.
10-12 Technical and consumer information
STI0466
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
STI0349
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
WTI0178
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.
Technical and consumer information 10-13
LTI0197
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.
WTI0173
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.
10-14 Technical and consumer information
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Symbol Name
Caution
Reference
ISO 7000 0434
Air Conditioning System
(MAC)
MAC System Lubricant Type
(PAG–POE)
Requires Registered Technician to
Service MAC System
ISO 2575 D01
Graphic
Flammable Refrigerant
Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols
To mount the front license plate, attach the license plate bracket to the grille assembly at the location marks (small dimples) using the two provided screws
O
.
NOTE:
LTI2714
Maximum screw length to attach license plate to bracket must be 0.63 in (16 mm).
Technical and consumer information 10-15
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
• Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard parts, fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly. This weight
does not
include passengers and cargo.
• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, cargo, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
label.
certification
• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.
• Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.
10-16 Technical and consumer information
• Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the
GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
For additional information, see “Mea-
surement of weights” (P. 10-20).
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total cargo weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.
Technical and consumer information 10-17
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit
Example
10-18 Technical and consumer information
LTI2335
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Towing a trailer with a vehicle that is not intended for towing may result in an accident involving injury or death.
WARNING
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Towing a trailer may result in an accident involving injury or death.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
(GVWR) or the (GAWR) for your vehicle. For additional information, see
“Measurement of weights” (P. 10-20).
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, see “Tire and Loading Informa-
LOADING TIPS
• The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
• Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
•
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
•
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
Technical and consumer information 10-19
TOWING A TRAILER
•
Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
• Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
• Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
• Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
• DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.
• For emergency towing procedures see “Towing recommended by
10-20 Technical and consumer information
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Manual Transmission (if so equipped)
• Always tow with the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
• After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and idle the engine with the transmission in N
(Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (if so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels.
Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Technical and consumer information 10-21
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
• Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
• Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
10-22 Technical and consumer information
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign.
However, Transport
Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada's
Defect Investigations and Recalls
Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510.
You may also report safety defects online at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
(English speakers) or http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/ securiteautomobile/menu.htm
(French speakers)
Or contact Transport Canada by mail at:
Transport Canada Motor Vehicle
Safety Investigations Laboratory
80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1
Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada's Road Safety
Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ securiteroutiere (French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at
1-800-387-0122.
Technical and consumer information 10-23
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the
“ready condition” for an Inspection/
Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.
10-24 Technical and consumer information
OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of
Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please visit the nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.
Technical and consumer information 10-25
MEMO
10-26 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
A
Active Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . .1-64
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-12
supplemental. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-12
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Air conditioner operation. . . . .4-35, 4-41
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . .4-44
Air conditioner specification label . .10-14
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-41
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-44
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . .5-127
Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-139
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
AM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49, 4-51
Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-52
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
FM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57 iPod® player operation. . . . . . . . . .4-57
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
USB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Automatic power window switch . . .2-73
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-28
Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . .2-13, 5-91
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-139, 8-12
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-22
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-14
Belt (See drive belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Blind Spot Warning (BSW). . . . . . . . . .5-36
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
Bluetooth® connections . . . . . . . . .4-81
Connecting procedure. . . . . . . . . .4-72
Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-127
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-26
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-127
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-17, 8-18
Self-adjusting brakes. . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-127
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-122
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-7
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
C
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-13
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-16
Chassis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . .2-29, 2-44
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-20, 1-21, 1-22, 1-24
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29, 1-35, 1-40
Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-5
Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-139
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
11-2
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . .4-7
Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . .4-63
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-41
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-6
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70
D
Daytime Running Light System . . . . . .2-57
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-58
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . .5-139
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Driving with manual transmission . . .5-21
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
E
Eco Drive Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-124
Emergency call (SOS) button . . . . . . . .2-61
Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-13, 6-2
Emission control information label . . . .10-13
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-22
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-14
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-11
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Engine Block Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-140
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-6
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-4
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
F
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-13
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . .8-11
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-124
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-23
Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . .2-28, 2-42
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-123
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-67
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-52
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-61
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-41
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-42
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-133
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
G
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
I
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-11
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-49, 5-14
Important vehicle information label . . .10-13
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-124
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . .3-28
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-58
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-58
11-3
Intelligent Around View® Monitor. . . . . .4-16
Intelligent Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . .5-61
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . .5-118
Intelligent Engine Brake. . . . . . . . . . .5-132
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-103
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-13
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . .3-16, 3-17
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-17
Intelligent Trace Control . . . . . . . . . .5-132
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75, 2-76
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
ISOFIX child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
J
Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-22
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-7
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
L
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-14
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-13
Emission control information label . .10-13
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-13
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-13
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-14
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-64
Lane Departure Warning (LDW). . . . . . .5-29
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Launch bar menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-15
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-12
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-26
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-26
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-52
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-52
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75, 2-76
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-13
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-43
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-76
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-7
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-23
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . .3-22
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-42
Low fuel warning light. . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-43
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-13
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-43
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
M
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2
11-4
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76
Menu button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-58
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-28
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74, 7-6
Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-27
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-7
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49, 5-14
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-69
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-11
Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-25
Owner's manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25
seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29, 1-35, 1-40
restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29, 1-35, 1-40
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-11
Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
P
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-125
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-67
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Power rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-126
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-126
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2
R
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-67
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . .2-16, 5-84
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-48
Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . .2-27, 2-42, 2-64
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . .5-134
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . .10-8
11-5
Registering a vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 5-16
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-22
S
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-7
Child seat belts . . . . .1-22, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-22
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-4
Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Infants and small children . . . . .1-20, 1-21
Injured person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-11
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11, 7-7
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-18
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-15
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-14, 2-12
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
11-6
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-49, 5-14
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-48
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Service manual order form . . . . . . . .10-25
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-18
Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64
Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-76
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-14
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system) . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-126
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74, 7-6
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-64
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-12
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Information and warning labels. . . . .1-64
Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-43
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Automatic power window switch. . . .2-73
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-52
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-52
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-58
Power door lock switch. . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-6
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49, 5-14
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-40
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-14
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . .10-21
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-13
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .5-5
2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) . . . . . . . .5-26
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Driving with manual transmission . . .5-21
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Trunk access through the rear seat . . . .3-23
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-22
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . .2-49, 5-14
Vehicle information display. . . . . .2-18, 2-32
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-16
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49, 5-14
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Voice Prompt Interrupt. . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-21
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .2-66
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-14
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-11
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129
Vehicle identification. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
W
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-12
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . .2-11
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-11
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . .2-28, 2-42
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-28, 2-43
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-13
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-43
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-14, 2-12
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-12
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-48
11-7
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-64
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Weights (See dimensions and weights) .10-11
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-72
Power rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-50
11-8
MEMO
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
CAUTION
• Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if
E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.
• Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
• Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
• Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate
MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and
California laws prohibit the use of
MMT in reformulated gasoline.
• U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
For additional information, see “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, see “Tire plac-
The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver's door. For additional information, see “Wheels and
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, see “Break-in sched-
ule” (P. 5-122). Failure to follow these recom-
mendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
To view the digital NissanConnect manual, go to www.nissanquickguide.com/#/guide/2023/sentra/browse
or snap this QR code with an appropriate QR code reader.
Printing : November 2022
Publication No.: OM23EM 0B18U0
Printed in the U.S.A.
‘23 B18-D
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Comprehensive Safety Systems: Detailed information on seat belts, child restraints, LATCH system, and various supplemental air bags (front, knee, side-impact, rollover).
Advanced Driver Assistance: Mentions Cruise Control, Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC), Automatic Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection, and Rear Automatic Braking.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminders: Visual and audible alerts for driver and front passenger seat belts.
Driver-Focused Controls: Explains instrument panel, gauges, vehicle information display, and steering wheel switches for audio/phone.
Comfort and Convenience: Adjustable front seats (manual/power), folding rear seat, head restraints, climate control, cup holders, and storage compartments.
DIY Maintenance Guidance: Provides locations for engine compartment checks, battery, fluids, and information on replacing bulbs.
Software License Information: Details on NISSAN Software License, updates, and End User License Agreement.
Frequently asked questions
For the most effective protection, the seat should be upright, and the occupant should sit well back and upright with both feet on the floor. The lap belt should be positioned low and snug across the hips, and the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest, away from the face and neck.
All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision and replaced if damaged or improperly operating. Child restraints and their hardware should also be inspected, and replaced if damaged, following manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving, as this can distract from vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly, potentially causing loss of control of the vehicle.
The two modes are Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR). The ELR allows the belt to extend and retract freely, locking during sudden stops, while the ALR mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.
Adjustable head restraints/headrests should be aligned so the center of your ear is approximately level with their center. If the ear position is higher, the head restraint/headrest should be placed at the highest position, ensuring it's locked in place.
The front passenger seat belt warning light and chime will activate if the seat belt is not fastened for 7 seconds after the ignition is ON, or if objects or external force on the seat change its classification to Occupied, especially at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.